JBL Home Theater System 201 User Manual

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby," "Pro Logic," "Surround EX," and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Manufactured under license from Lucasfilm Ltd. U.S. Patent Nos. 5,043,970; 5,189,703; and/or 5,222,059. European Patent No. 0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents  
pending. Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucasfilm Ltd. Surround EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under authorization.  
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. U.S. Patent Nos. 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and  
pending. "DTS," "DTS-ES Extended Surround," and "Neo:6" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. © 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights  
reserved.  
JBL SIS Products Group  
8500 Balboa Boulevard  
Northridge, CA 91329  
250 Crossways Park Drive  
Woodbury, NY 11797  
800-336-4JBL  
"Lexicon," "LOGIC7," and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc. U.S. Patent Nos. D454,553; D454,860; 5,796,844; 5,870,480  
and other worldwide patents issued and pending.  
© 2003 Harman international Industries, Incorporated, All rights reserved.  
This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of JBL Synthesis. The information it contains is subject to change without notice. JBL Synthesis  
assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this document.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
SDP-5  
Introduction  
Section 1: Getting Started  
About the SDP-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Highlights • Product Registration  
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii  
Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Remote Control Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v  
US  
Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v  
Instrucciones de seguridad importantes . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi  
Instructions importantes relatives à la sécurité. . . . . . . . . vi  
Importanti norme di sicurezza. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
Instruções importantes de segurança. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
Vigtig information om sikkerhed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii  
Tärkeitä turvallisuusohjeita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii  
Viktig informasjon om sikkerhet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Viktiga säkerhetsföreskrifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
DE  
ES  
FR  
IT  
Section 2: Basic Operation  
Front Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Rear Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Operation Considerations • MAIN MENU • Menu Navigation • Menu Item  
Selection • Command Bank Activation • Command Matrix  
PT  
DK  
FI  
Understanding the Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Two-Line Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
NO  
SE  
STATUS Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
2CH STATUS • DOLBY D STATUS • dts(-ES) STATUS • 5.1a BYPASS STATUS •  
2CH BYPASS STATUS • DIGITAL STATUS  
Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Auspacken und Überprüfung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Desembalaje e inspección . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Contenu de l’emballage et inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Disimballaggio ed ispezione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Retirando a embalagem e inspecionando . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
US  
DE  
ES  
FR  
IT  
STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
STATUS Menu Level Meters  
Section 3: SETUP  
SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
PT  
INPUT SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Changing Input Names (NAME) • Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors •  
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes • Configuring Advanced Zone Settings  
SPEAKER SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26  
Custom Speaker Setups • THX Speaker Setups • Measuring Speaker Distances •  
Calibrating Output Levels  
. . . Section 3: SETUP continues on page iv  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
JBL Synthesis  
Section 3: SETUP (continued from page iii)  
Section 6: Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
REAR PANEL CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Restoring Factory-Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
DISPLAY SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47  
On-Screen Display Setup • Front Panel Display Setup  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53  
TRIGGER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54  
LOCK OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56  
Appendix  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Declaration of Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14  
Section 4: AUDIO CONTROLS  
AUDIO CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Section 5: MODE ADJUST  
MODE ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Index  
Listening Mode Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters • Mode and Buttons •  
Mode Family Selection Buttons  
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Back Cover  
Listening Mode Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
L7 FILM • L7 TV • L7 MUSIC • L7 MUSIC SURR • DOLBY PLII + THX • DOLBY  
PLII MOVIE • DOLBY PLII MUSIC • DOLBY PRO LOGIC • dts NEO:6 FILM • dts  
NEO:6 MUSIC • NIGHTCLUB • CONCERT HALL • CHURCH • CATHEDRAL •  
PANORAMA • PANORAMA CALIBRATION • PARTY • 2-CHANNEL • MONO  
LOGIC • MONO SURROUND • MONO • 5.1 L7 FILM • 5.1 L7 TV • 5.1 L7  
MUSIC • 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX ULTRA2, & 5.1 THX SurEX • 5.1 THX MUSIC •  
DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX • 5.1 2-CHANNEL • 5.1 MONO LOGIC  
• 5.1 MONO SURR • 5.1 MONO • dts-ES Decoding • dts(-ES) L7 FILM •  
dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC • dts THX ULTRA2 & dts-ES THX • dts THX MUSIC •  
dts(-ES) • dts(-ES) 2-CHAN • 5.1a BYPASS • 2CH BYPASS  
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions . . . . 5-28  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
SDP-5  
ENISH  
DEUTSCH  
US  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
US  
DE  
DE  
WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE  
Save these instructions for later use.  
Bewahren Sie diese Anleitungen zur späteren Benutzung auf.  
Follow all instructions and warnings marked on the unit.  
Befolgen Sie alle Anleitungen und alle Warnhinweise auf dem Gerät  
Always use with the correct line voltage. Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions  
for power requirements. Be advised that different operating voltages may require the use  
of a different line cord and/or attachment plug.  
Betreiben Sie das Gerät immer mit der korrekten Netzspannung. Angaben über den  
Strombedarf entnehmen Sie bitte den Betriebsanweisungen des Herstellers. Bei  
unterschiedlichen Betriebsspannungen kann die Verwendung anderer Netzkabel und/oder  
Anschlußstecker erforderlich werden.  
Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack, or directly above heat-producing equipment  
such as power amplifiers. Observe the maximum ambient operating temperature listed in  
the product specification.  
Bauen Sie das Gerät nie in ein unbelüftetes Rack oder direkt über Wärme erzeugenden  
Geräten wie Verstärkern ein. Beachten Sie die in der Produktspezifikation aufgeführte  
maximale Umgebungstemperatur für den Betrieb.  
Slots and openings on the case are provided for ventilation; to ensure reliable operation  
and prevent it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. Never  
push objects of any kind through any of the ventilation slots. Never spill liquid of any kind  
on the unit.  
Schlitze und Öffnungen in der Box dienen der Belüftung, damit das Gerät zuverlässig läuft  
und sich nicht überhitzt. Diese Öffnungen dürfen nicht abgedeckt oder blockiert werden.  
Auch dürfen keine Gegenstände in sie hineingesteckt werden. Verschütten Sie niemals  
Flüssigkeiten, gleich welcher Art, auf das Gerät.  
Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly to any of the unit’s connectors.  
Schließen Sie niemals Stromausgänge des Audioverstärkers direkt an das Gerät an.  
To prevent shock or fire hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture, or operate it  
where it will be exposed to water.  
Zur Vermeidung von elektrischen Schlägen oder Brandgefahr darf das Gerät weder Regen  
noch Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt oder an Orten betrieben werden, wo es mit Wasser in  
Berührung kommen kann.  
Do not attempt to operate the unit if it has been dropped, damaged, exposed to liquids, or  
if it exhibits a distinct change in performance indicating the need for service.  
Versuchen Sie nie, das Gerät zu betreiben, wenn es fallen gelassen, beschädigt oder  
Flüssigkeiten ausgesetzt wurde oder wenn ein deutlicher Leistungsunterschied zu  
verzeichnen ist, der darauf hinweist, dass es gewartet werden muss.  
This unit should only be opened by qualified service personnel. Removing covers will  
expose you to hazardous voltages.  
Dieser Apparat sollte nur von qualifizierten Fachleuten geöffnet werden. Das Abnehmen  
von Abdeckungen setzt Sie gefährlichen Spannungen aus.  
This triangle, which appears on your component, alerts you to the presence of  
uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside the enclosure…voltage that may be sufficient  
to constitute a risk of shock.  
Dieses Dreieck, welches auf Ihrem Bauteil angebracht ist, warnt Sie vor dem  
Vorhandensein nicht isolierter gef hrlicher Spannung im Gerät. Diese Spannung  
kann so hoch sein, dass das Risiko eines Stromschlags besteht.  
This triangle, which appears on your component, alerts you to important operating  
and maintenance instructions in this accompanying literature.  
Dieses Dreieck, welches auf Ihrem Bauteil angebracht ist, macht Sie auf wichtige  
Betriebs- und Wartungshinweise in diesen Hinweisen aufmerksam.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
JBL Synthesis  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
ES  
ES  
FR  
FR  
INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES  
INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANTES RELATIVES  
À LA SÉCURITÉ  
Guarde estas instrucciones para futuras referencias.  
Conservez ces instructions pour pouvoir vous y référer ultérieurement.  
Siga todas las instrucciones y tenga en cuenta las advertencias que aparecen en la  
unidad y en las instrucciones de funcionamiento.  
Suivez toutes ces instructions et tenez compte de tous les avertissements indiqués sur  
l’appareil et dans la documentation fournie avec l’appareil.  
Utilice siempre la tensión de línea correcta. Consulte las instrucciones del fabricante,  
donde se especifican los requisitos de alimentación. Tenga en cuenta que unas tensiones  
operativas diferentes pueden precisar de la utilización de diferentes cables de  
alimentación y/o enchufes.  
Utilisez toujours la tension secteur correcte. Consultez les instructions du fabricant  
précisant les caractéristiques d’alimentation à respecter. Attention, le type de cordon  
secteur et/ou de prise secteur peut varier selon des tensions en vigueur dans l’installation.  
No instale la unidad en un rack sin ventilación, o directamente sobre equipos que generen  
calor, como amplificadores de potencia. Tenga en cuenta la temperatura operativa  
ambiental máxima que se detalla en las especificaciones del producto.  
N’installez pas l’appareil dans un rack mal ventilé ou directement au-dessus d’un appareil  
dégageant de la chaleur comme un amplificateur de puissance. Respectez la température  
maximale de fonctionnement précisée dans les caractéristiques techniques.  
Las ranuras y aberturas del equipo son para su ventilación - para garantizar un  
funcionamiento fiable y evitar que la unidad se sobrecaliente, no bloquee, cubra o inserte  
objetos en las aberturas. No derrame nunca líquidos de ningún tipo sobre la unidad.  
Les ouvertures dans le boîtier assurent la bonne ventilation de l’appareil, évitent toute  
surchauffe et assurent le bon fonctionnement du système. Veillez à ne pas obstruer,  
couvrir ou insérer d’objets dans ces ouvertures. Veillez à ne pas renverser de liquide sur  
l’appareil.  
Nunca conecte directamente salidas de amplificadores de potencia de audio a ninguno de  
los conectores de la unidad.  
Ne reliez jamais directement les sorties audio des amplificateurs de puissance aux  
connecteurs de l’appareil.  
Para evitar descargas eléctricas o incendios, no exponga la unidad a la humedad o la  
lluvia, ni la utilice donde pueda estar expuesta al agua.  
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’électrocution ou d’incendie, n’exposez pas l’appareil à la pluie  
ou à l’humidité; ne l’utilisez pas dans des endroits exposés aux projections de liquides.  
No intente utilizar la unidad si ésta ha caído, se ha dañado, ha estado expuesta a líquidos,  
o si muestra un cambio importante en sus prestaciones, lo cual indicaría la necesidad de  
una reparación.  
N’essayez pas d’utiliser l’appareil si celui-ci est tombé, a été endommagé, exposé à des  
projections de liquides ou si vous constatez des dysfonctionnements nécessitant  
l’intervention d’un technicien spécialisé.  
Das esta unidad deberá ser abierta únicamente por personal calificado. Si usted quita las  
coberturas se expondrá a voltajes peligrosos.  
Cet appareil ne doit être ouvert que par un personnel de service qualifié. En enlevant les  
couvercles vous vous exposez à des tensions électriques dangereuses.  
Este triangulo, que aparece en su componente, alerta de la presencia de una tensin  
peligrosa no aislada en el interior del equipo - una tensi nique puede ser suficiente  
como para constituir un riesgo de descarga electrica.  
Le symbole de l’ clair fl ch dans un triangle quilat ral sert alerter l’utilisateur sur la pr  
sence l’int rieur de l’appareil de tensions non isol es susceptibles de constituer un  
risque d’electrocution.  
Este triangulo, que aparece en su equipo, le alerta de instrucciones operativas y de  
mantenimiento importantes en los documentos que acompa an el producto.  
Le point d’exclamation dans un triangle quilat ral sert alerter l’utilisateur sur la pr  
sence de nombreuses instructions de maintenance dans le manuel fourni avec  
l’appareil.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
SDP-5  
ITALIANO  
PORTUGUESE  
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA  
IT  
IT  
PT  
PT  
IMPORTANTI NORME DI SICUREZZA  
Conservare le presenti norme per l’utilizzo futuro.  
Guarde essas instruções para uso posterior.  
Seguire sempre tutte le istruzioni e gli avvertimenti segnati sull’unità e nelle istruzioni  
operative.  
Siga todas as instruções e fique atento aos avisos marcados na unidade e nas instruções  
de operação.  
Utilizzare sempre la corretta tensione di alimentazione. Fare riferimento al manuale del  
costruttore per le caratteristiche di alimentazione. Tensioni di rete diverse necessitano  
anche di un diverso cavo con spine differenti.  
Sempre use com a voltagem correta. Veja no manual de instruções do fabricante qual a  
alimentação necessária. Lembre-se que voltagens de operação diferentes podem  
precisar de um cabo ou plug diferentes.  
Non installare l’unità in un rack poco ventilato, o direttamente sopra apparecchiature che  
producono calore, come amplificatori di potenza. Controllare la massima temperatura  
ambientale di esercizio sulle specifiche tecniche del prodotto.  
Não instale a unidade em um suporte sem ventilação ou diretamente acima de  
equipamentos que produzam calor, como transformadores. Observe a temperatura  
ambiente máxima de operação indicada na especificação do produto.  
Fori ed aperture nei pannelli sono necessari per garantire un corretta ventilazione e  
prevenire surriscaldamenti. Queste aperture non devono essere coperte o ostruite. Non  
inserire oggetti di alcun tipo nei fori di ventilazione. Evitare il contatto con liquidi di  
qualsiasi genere.  
O revestimento da unidade é provido de fendas e aberturas para ventilação – para  
assegurar uma operação confiável e evitar que a unidade se superaqueça. Não bloqueie,  
cubra ou insira objetos nas aberturas. Nunca derrube líquido de qualquer espécie na  
unidade.  
Evitare di collegare le uscite di un amplificatore di potenza direttamente a qualsiasi  
connettore dell’unità.  
Nunca ligue saídas de amplificadores de áudio diretamente a qualquer dos conectores da  
unidade.  
Per evitare il rischio di scosse elettriche non esporre il prodotto a pioggia o umidità. Evitare  
l’uso dove possa essere esposto all’acqua.  
Para evitar danos de choque ou fogo, não exponha a unidade à chuva ou umidade, ou  
opere-a onde haja exposição à água.  
Non tentare di utilizzare il prodotto se è caduto, se è stato a contatto con liquidi, o mostra  
chiari segni di danneggiamento o cambio di prestazioni che indicano la necessità di  
assistenza tecnica.  
Não tente operar a unidade se ela for derrubada, danificada, exposta à líquidos ou  
apresente uma mudança de performance notável, indicando a necessidade de  
manutenção.  
Ogni intervento sull’unità va eseguito esclusivamente da personale qualificato. La  
rimozione della copertura comporta l’esposizione al pericolo di folgorazione.  
Esta unidade só deveria ser aberta através de pessoal de serviço qualificado. Removendo  
coberturas o exporão a voltagens perigosas.  
Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte la presenza di tensioni  
pericolose non isolate all interno della copertura – tali tensioni rappresentano un  
pericolo di folgorazione.  
Esse triângulo que aparece no seu console, alerta para a presença de voltagem  
perigosa e não isolada no recinto – voltagem que pode ser suficiente para constituir  
um risco de choque.  
Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte l’utente della presenza nella  
documentazione allegata di importanti istruzioni relative al funzionamento ed alla  
manutenzione.  
Esse triângulo ques aparece no seu console alerta para instruções importantes de  
operação e manutenção neste manual.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
JBL Synthesis  
DANSK  
SUOMI  
DK  
DK  
FI  
FI  
VIGTIG INFORMATION OM SIKKERHED  
TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA  
Gem denne vejledning til senere brug.  
Følg alle anvisninger og advarsler på apparatet.  
Säilytä nämä ohjeet tulevaa käyttöä varten.  
Seuraa kaikkia yksikköön merkittyjä ohjeita ja varoituksia.  
Apparatet skal altid tilsluttes den korrekte spænding. Der henvises til brugsanvisningen,  
der indeholder specifikationer for strømforsyning. Der gøres opmærksom på, at ved  
varierende driftsspændinger kan det blive nødvendigt at bruge andre lednings- og/eller  
stiktyper.  
Käytä aina oikeaa verkkojännitettä. Tehovaatimukset selviävät valmistajan käyttöohjeista.  
Huomaa, että eri käyttöjännitteet saattavat vaatia toisenlaisen verkkojohdon ja/tai  
-pistokkeen käytön.  
Älä asenna yksikköä telineeseen jossa ei ole tuuletusta, tai välittömästi lämpöä tuottavien  
laitteiden, esim. tehovahvistimien, yläpuolelle.Ympäristön lämpötila käytössä ei saa ylittää  
tuotespesifikaation maksimilämpötilaa.  
Apparatet må ikke monteres i et kabinet uden ventilation eller lige over andet udstyr, der  
udvikler varme, f.eks. forstærkere. Den maksimale omgivelsestemperatur ved drift, der  
står opført i specifikationerne, skal overholdes.  
Kotelo on varustettu tuuletusreiillä ja -aukoilla. Luotettavan toiminnan varmistamiseksi ja  
ylilämpenemisen välttämiseksi näitä aukkoja ei saa sulkea tai peittää. Mitään esineitä ei  
saa työntää tuuletusaukkoihin. Mitään nesteitä ei saa kaataa yksikköön.  
Der er ventilationsåbninger i kabinettet. For at sikre apparatets drift og hindre over  
phedning må disse åbninger ikke blokeres eller tildækkes. Stik aldrig noget ind igennem  
ventilationsåbningerne, og pas på aldrig at spilde nogen form for væske på apparatet.  
Älä kytke audiotehovahvistimen lähtöjä suoraan mihinkään yksikön liittimeen.  
Udgangsstik fra audioforstærkere må aldrig sættes direkte i apparatet.  
Sähköiskun ja palovaaran välttämiseksi yksikkö ei saa olla sateessa tai kosteassa, eikä  
sitä saa käyttää märässä ympäristössä.  
Apparatet må ikke udsættes for regn eller fugt og må ikke bruges i nærheden af vand for  
at undgå risiko for elektrisk stød og brand.  
Älä käytä yksikköä jos se on pudonnut, vaurioitunut, kostunut, tai jos sen suorituskyky on  
huomattavasti muuttunut, mikä vaatii huoltoa.  
Apparatet må aldrig bruges, hvis det er blevet stødt, beskadiget eller vådt, eller hvis  
ændringer i ydelsen tyder på, at det trænger til eftersyn.  
Yksikön saa avata vain laitteeseen perehtynyt huoltohenkilö. Kansien poisto altistaa sinut  
vaarallisille jännitteille.  
Dette apparat må kun åbnes af fagfolk. Hvis dækslet tages af, udsættes man for livsfarlig  
højspænding.  
Tämä kolmio, joka esiintyy komponentissasi, varoittaa sinua eristämättömän  
vaarallisen jännitteen esiintymisestä yksikön sisällä. Tämä jännite saattaa olla  
riittävän korkea aiheuttamaan sähköiskuvaaran.  
Denne mærkat på komponenten advarer om uisoleret, farlig spænding i apparatet -  
høj nok til at give elektrisk stød.  
Denne mærkat på komponenten advarer om vigtig driftsog vedligeholdsinformation  
i den tilhørende litteratur.  
Tämä kolmio, joka esiintyy komponentissasi, kertoo sinulle, että tässä  
tuotedokumentoinnissa esiintyy tärkeitä käyttö- ja ylläpito-ohjeita.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
SDP-5  
NORSK  
SVENSKA  
NO  
NO  
SE  
SE  
VIKTIG INFORMASJON OM SIKKERHET  
VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSFÖRESKRIFTER  
Ta vare på denne veiledningen for senere bruk.  
Følg alle anvisningene og advarslene som er angitt på apparatet.  
Spara dessa föreskrifter för framtida bruk.  
Följ alla anvisningar och varningar som anges på enheten.  
Apparatet skal alltid anvendes med korrekt spenning. Produktbeskrivelsen inneholder  
spesifikasjoner for strømkrav. Vær oppmerksom på at det ved ulike driftsspenninger kan  
være nødvendig å bruke en annen ledning- og/eller støpseltype.  
Använd alltid rätt nätspänning. Se tillverkarens bruksanvisningar för information om  
effektkrav. Märkväl, att andra matningsspänningar eventuellt kräver att en annan typs  
nätsladd och/eller kontakt används.  
Apparatet skal ikke monteres i skap uten ventilasjon, eller direkte over varmeproduserende  
utstyr, som for eksempel kraftforsterkere. Den maksimale romtemperaturen som står  
oppgitt i produktbeskrivelsen, skal overholdes.  
Installera inte enheten i ett oventilerat stativ, eller direkt ovanför utrustningar som avger  
värme, t ex effektförstärkare. Se till att omgivningens temperatur vid drift inte överskrider  
det angivna värdet i produktspecifikationen.  
Apparatet er utstyrt med ventilasjonsåpninger. For at apparatet skal være pålitelig i bruk  
og ikke veropphetes, må disse åpningene ikke blokkeres eller tildekkes. Stikk aldri noe inn  
i ventilasjonsåpningene, og pass på at det aldri søles noen form for væske på apparatet.  
Behållaren är försedd med hål och öppningar för ventilering. För att garantera tillförlitlig  
funktion och förhindra överhettning får dessa öppningar inte blockeras eller täckas. Inga  
föremål får skuffas in genom ventilationshålen. Inga vätskor får spillas på enheten.  
Utgangsplugger fra audioforsterkere skal aldri koples direkte til apparatet.  
Anslut aldrig audioeffektförstärkarutgångar direkt till någon av enhetens kontakter.  
Unngå brannfare og elektrisk støt ved å sørge for at apparatet ikke utsettes for regn eller  
fuktighet og ikke anvendes i nærheten av vann.  
För att undvika elstöt eller brandfara får enheten inte utsättas för regn eller fukt, eller  
användas på ställen där den blir våt.  
Apparatet skal ikke brukes hvis det har blitt utsatt for støt, er skadet eller blitt vått, eller hvis  
endringer i ytelsen tyder på at det trenger service.  
Använd inte enheten om den har fallit i golvet, skadats, blivit våt, eller om dess prestanda  
förändrats märkbart, vilket kräver service.  
Dette apparatet skal kun åpnes av fagfolk. Hvis dekselet fjernes, utsettes man for livsfarlig  
høyspenning.  
Enheten får öppnas endast av behörig servicepersonal. Farliga spänningar blir tillgängliga  
när locken tas bort.  
Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten, som er en advarsel om at det finnes  
uisolert, farlig spenning inne i kabinettet - høy nok til å utgjøre en fare for elektrisk  
støt.  
Denna triangel, som visas på din komponent, varnar dig om en oisolerad farlig  
spänning inne i enheten. Denna spänning är eventuellt så hög att fara för elstöt  
föreligger.  
Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten, som betyr at den tilhørende  
litteraturen inneholder viktige opplysninger om drift og ved.  
Denna triangel, som visas på din komponent, anger att viktiga bruksanvisningar och  
serviceanvisningar ingår i dokumentationen i fråga.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
JBL Synthesis  
US  
Unpacking and Inspection  
FR  
Contenu de l’emballage et inspection  
After unpacking the unit, save all packing materials in case the unit  
ever needs to be shipped. Thoroughly inspect the modules and  
packing materials for signs of damage. Report any damage to the  
carrier at once; report equipment malfunction to the dealer.  
Après avoir ouvert l’emballage, conservez-le pour tout retour.  
Inspectez avec soin les modules et les matériaux d’emballage pour  
tout signe de dommage. Veuillez rapporter immédiatement les  
dommages auprès du transporteur. Les dysfonctionnements du  
matériel doivent être signalés à votre revendeur.  
DE  
Auspacken und Überprüfung  
IT  
Disimballaggio ed ispezione  
Bewahren Sie nach dem Auspacken des Geräts das  
Verpackungsmaterial für den Fall auf, dass Sie das Gerät wieder  
versenden müssen. Überprüfen Sie die Module und die Verpackung  
sorgfältig auf Anzeichen von Beschädigung. Etwaige Schäden sind  
dem Transporteur unverzüglich anzuzeigen; Funktionsstörungen  
sind dem zuständigen Händler zu melden.  
Dopo aver disimballato l’unità, salvi tutto il materiale d’imballaggio,  
in caso Lei abbia bisogno di spedire l’unità. Ispezioni attentamente  
i moduli ed il materiale d’imballaggio per vedere se riportano  
segni di danno. Riporti subito ogni segno di danno al corriere;  
riferisca il malfunzionamento dell’attrezzatura al suo rivenditore.  
ES  
Desembalaje e inspección  
PT  
Retirando a embalagem e inspecionando  
Después de desembalar la unidad, guarde todos los materiales de  
embalaje por si alguna vez transportar la unidad. Inspeccione con  
atención los módulos y los materiales de embalaje para comprobar  
que no muestren desperfectos. Informe inmediatamente de  
cualquier desperfecto al transportista; informe de cualquier  
problema de funcionamiento del equipo a su distribuidor.  
Depois de desembalar a unidade, guarde a embalagem caso precise  
enviar a unidade para manutenção. Inspecione cuidadosamente o  
módulo e a embalagem procurando sinais de dano. Avise à loja  
qualquer tipo de dano ou mal funcionamento do equipamento.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Getting Started  
About the SDP-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Highlights • Product Registration  
Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Remote Control Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
JBL Synthesis  
With four floating-point SHARC™ digital signal processing (DSP)  
engines, the SDP-5 boasts enormous processing power. These  
powerful processors perform custom processing such as LOGIC7  
decoding, bass enhancement, dialog enhancement, auto azimuth,  
5-speaker enhancement, bass management, high-precision digital  
crossovers, and audio controls. These features are available at  
sample rates up to 96kHz, with 24-bit resolution to retain top  
performance from all sources. In addition, a fifth DSP engine is  
dedicated to decoding multi-channel compressed audio sources.  
ABOUT THE SDP-5  
Thank you for purchasing the SDP-5 Digital Controller, an 8-  
channel audio and video control center with independent zone  
monitoring that provides control of audio and video source  
selection in two zones at the same time. The SDP-5 includes eight  
configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its eight  
digital audio, eight analog audio, five composite video, five S-video,  
or three component video input connectors. The analog connectors  
can be configured for up to two 5.1-channel sources.  
The SDP-5 is one of the most advanced audio and video control  
centers available. High-precision 24-bit/96kHz A/D converters can  
be used to convert stereo analog audio input signals to digital  
signals, allowing the SDP-5 to provide the benefits of precise digital  
signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity. Alternatively,  
stereo analog signals can bypass A/D conversion and internal  
processing, following a pure signal path directly to the output  
connectors.  
Inside and out, the SDP-5 is designed for possible future  
developments. The rear panel houses one RS-232 connector  
capable of performing configuration downloads and flash memory  
software upgrades and another capable of supporting future  
developments. The rear panel also includes two removable access  
panels to accommodate connectors for emerging technologies.  
More than just an audio and video control center, the SDP-5 offers  
the latest version of the critically acclaimed LOGIC7® decoding,  
which creates a 7.1-channel output signal from stereo, 5.1-, and  
6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, LOGIC7 decoding is  
compatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding.  
Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible, LOGIC7 is  
widely regarded as the finest available.  
Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage phase  
lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection. Auto  
azimuth technology corrects timing and level imbalances in stereo  
sources, ensuring exceptionally accurate playback of surround-  
encoded sources. A digital audio pass-through output is available for  
recording digital signals with a CD recorder or a similar component.  
In addition to LOGIC7, the SDP-5 offers Dolby Digital Surround EX,  
Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic, dts 96/24, dts NEO:6, dts-ES,  
THX Ultra2, and THX Surround EX decoding. THX Ultra2 Certification  
guarantees that the SDP-5 meets the highest THX specifications.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
SDP-5  
Complementing its audio performance, the SDP-5 features two  
broadcast-quality video switchers. A wide-bandwidth component  
video switcher accepts analog component or RGB video signals,  
while a composite and S-video switcher accepts high-quality NTSC,  
PAL, or SECAM video signals. The component video switcher can  
pass High-Definition TV (HDTV) signals, as well as Standard-  
Definition TV signals. Both switchers are designed to pass video  
signals without alteration or degradation.  
Built to professional standards, the SDP-5 is designed to serve as the  
control center in any high-quality home theater. Even the most  
demanding enthusiast will be impressed with its unique  
combination of power, performance, flexibility, and technological  
sophistication. With extensive expansion capabilities, the SDP-5  
represents a solid investment that will retain its value in the face of  
rapidly emerging technologies.  
HIGHLIGHTS  
8 channels  
Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro Logic II, and Dolby  
Pro Logic decoding  
8 configurable inputs  
2 independent zones  
dts 96/24, dts-ES (discrete and matrix), and dts NEO:6  
decoding  
4 S/PDIF coaxial and 4 S/PDIF optical (Toslink) digital audio  
input connectors  
THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding  
THX Ultra2 Certification  
24-bit/192kHz D/A converters for all audio channels  
Up to two 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors  
Analog bypass option for stereo audio input connectors  
Flash memory software upgrade capabilities  
2 internal expansion slots for future possibilities  
Digital audio output connector  
RS-232 control  
Auto switching between digital and analog audio input  
connectors  
3 component video input connectors with full HDTV  
compatibility  
Rear panel IR input connector  
2 trigger output connectors  
5 S-video input connectors  
19-inch rack-mount kit  
5 composite video input connectors  
Four 32-bit DSP engines  
Separate DSP engine for decoding compressed audio sources  
Broadcast-quality video switching  
LOGIC7 decoding  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
JBL Synthesis  
INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS  
Do Not . . .  
The SDP-5 requires special care during installation to ensure  
optimal performance. Pay particular attention to the bulleted items  
that begin below and to other precautions that appear throughout  
this user guide.  
Place the SDP-5 on a thick rug or carpet or cover the SDP-5  
with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.  
Place the SDP-5 on a windowsill or in another location in which  
it will be exposed to direct sunlight.  
Do . . .  
Install the SDP-5 on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table or  
shelf or in a standard 19-inch equipment rack using the  
enclosed rack-mount kit.  
Obstruct the front panel IR receiver window shown on page  
2-3. The remote control must be in line of sight with the IR  
receiver for proper operation. Refer to page 2-9 for more  
information about remote control operation considerations.  
Select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.  
Do Not . . .  
Install the SDP-5 on a surface that is unstable or unable to  
support all four of its feet, unless it is installed in an equipment  
rack.  
Stack the SDP-5 directly above heat-producing equipment  
such as power amplifiers or other components that generate  
heat during use.  
Before moving the SDP-5, make sure it is powered off with the  
rear panel power switch. Then, make sure the power cord is  
unplugged from the wall outlet.  
CAUTION  
Expose the SDP-5 to high temperatures, humidity, steam,  
smoke, dampness, or excessive dust. Avoid installing the  
SDP-5 near radiators and other heat-producing appliances.  
Install the SDP-5 near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cable TV  
decoders, and other RF-emitting devices that might cause  
interference.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
SDP-5  
REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION  
The remote control requires two AA batteries that should be replaced as needed. It is recommended to use Alkaline batteries, which last longer  
without leaking. When the batteries are low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition that prevents it from operating the  
SDP-5. When this occurs, follow the instructions below to replace the batteries. Normal operation will resume when the new batteries are  
installed.  
To replace the remote control batteries:  
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Then, remove the battery compartment cover as shown in the figure  
below (left). To do this, press the tab attached to the cover. When the tab is pressed, pull the cover away from the remote control.  
2. Remove old batteries inserted in the compartment (if applicable).  
3. Insert two AA batteries in the compartment as shown in the figure below (center). Make sure the batteries are correctly inserted observing  
the proper polarity.  
4. When new batteries have been installed, close the battery compartment cover as shown in the figure below (right). To do this, align the  
cover with the guide on the back of the remote control. When the cover is aligned, press the cover until it "snaps" into place.  
5. Dispose of the old batteries (if applicable).  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Basic Operation  
Front Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Rear Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Operation Considerations • MAIN MENU • Menu Navigation • Menu Item Selection •  
Command Bank Activation • Command Matrix  
Understanding the Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Two-Line Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
STATUS Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
2CH STATUS • DOLBY D STATUS • dts(-ES) STATUS • 5.1a BYPASS STATUS •  
2CH BYPASS STATUS • DIGITAL STATUS  
STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
STATUS Menu Level Meters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW  
2
3
5
7
9
Main  
Zone 2  
DVD1  
DVD2  
CD  
Sat  
VCR  
Aux  
DVD1  
DVD2  
Sat  
VCR  
Aux  
Mode  
TV  
Tuner  
TV  
CD  
Tuner  
SDP-5 Digital Surround Processor/Controller  
Mute  
Off  
Off  
1
4
6
8
10  
standby button activates standby mode and deactivates the  
SDP-5. The red standby button LED lights to indicate that  
standby mode is activated.  
1. Standby Button  
Activates and deactivates standby mode when the SDP-5 is  
powered on with the rear panel power switch (2-5). The  
standby button performs no function when the SDP-5 is  
powered off with the rear panel power switch.  
2. Front Panel Display  
Indicates the current input, listening mode, input source, and  
volume level as shown above. This 2 x 20 character display can  
also be used to view messages and menus, one line at a time.  
Refer to the Menu Navigation section that begins on page 2-9  
for more information.  
When standby mode is activated, pressing the standby button  
deactivates standby mode and activates the SDP-5, including  
all zones that were activated during the previous operating  
session. When standby mode is deactivated, pressing the  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
To use the volume knob to adjust Zone 2 volume level:  
3. IR Receiver  
1. Press and hold the front panel Zone 2 input selection  
button that corresponds with the current input source. For  
instance, if the current input source is using the DVD1  
input, press and hold the Zone 2 DVD1 input selection  
button.  
Receives infrared commands  
from the SDP-5 remote  
control (2-9). There are  
three LEDS located in this  
area as shown at the right.  
An amber LED blinks when  
a remote control command is received. A red LED lights when  
the A/D converters are overloading. And, a blue LED lights  
when the SDP-5 is powered on and activated – even if the  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to  
ALWAYS OFF (3-52).  
Red LED  
Blue LED  
Amber LED  
2. While holding the selected Zone 2  
ZONE2 VOLUME -37dB  
input selection button, rotate the  
volume knob clockwise to increase or  
counterclockwise to decrease volume level in 1dB  
increments. The horizontal bar graph (2-10) shown at the  
right appears on the on-screen and front panel displays.  
This graph illustrates the position at which the current  
Zone 2 volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB  
volume range.  
4. Volume Knob  
Adjusts volume level in the Main Zone or Zone 2.  
3. Release the selected Zone 2 input selection button when  
Zone 2 volume level has been set.  
Note:  
When SDP-5 output levels have been properly  
calibrated (3-39), the +0dB volume level setting  
corresponds to THX reference levels (75dB).  
Note:  
Remote control input selection buttons cannot be  
used to select Zone 2 volume level adjustment, even  
if the Zone 2 command bank is activated.  
To use the volume knob to adjust Main Zone volume level:  
Rotate the volume knob clockwise  
to increase or counterclockwise  
to decrease volume level in 1dB  
increments. The horizontal bar graph (2-10) shown at the  
right appears on the on-screen and front panel displays.  
This graph illustrates the position at which the current  
Main Zone volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB  
volume range.  
VOLUME  
-37dB  
5. Mode and Buttons  
Scroll to the previous () and the next () available listening  
mode. Scrolling occurs in the order shown on the MODE  
ADJUST menu (5-2). Refer to the Listening Mode Activation  
section that begins on page 5-2 for more information.  
. . . Front Panel Overview continues on page 2-4  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
Front Panel Overview (continued from page 2-3)  
6. Mute Button  
9. Zone 2 Input Selection Buttons  
Mutes Main Zone volume level and restores Main Zone volume  
to its original level. Pressing the Mute button the first time  
lowers Main Zone volume level. The message "MUTE ON"  
appears on the on-screen and front panel displays. Pressing the  
Mute button again restores Main Zone volume to its original  
level. Refer to page 3-53 for information about using the  
MUTE LEVEL parameter to set mute levels.  
Selects the input in Zone 2. When an input is selected, an  
amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection button.  
When Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 input selection  
button activates Zone 2 and selects the corresponding input.  
The Main Zone remains deactivated until a Main Zone input is  
selected.  
The amber Mute button LED lights whenever mute is activated,  
whether activated automatically or manually. For instance, the  
SDP-5 briefly activates mute when changing input sources or  
listening modes.  
10.Zone 2 Off Button  
Deactivates Zone 2.  
7. Main Zone Input Selection Buttons  
Selects the input in the Main Zone. When an input is selected,  
a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection button.  
When the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zone  
input selection button activates the Main Zone and selects  
the corresponding input. Zone 2 remains deactivated until a  
Zone 2 input is selected.  
8. Main Zone Off Button  
Deactivates the Main Zone.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
REAR PANEL OVERVIEW  
5. Analog Audio Input Connectors  
Provide analog audio input in the Main Zone and Zone 2. Eight  
stereo analog audio input connectors labeled 1 to 8 are  
available. The connectors labeled 3, 4, and 5 and 6, 7, and 8  
can be configured as 5.1-channel connectors. When a 5.1-  
channel analog audio source is present in the Main Zone, input  
signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as  
indicated below. When a 5.1-channel analog source is present  
in the Main Zone and the INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN  
parameter is set to DMIX, only the (L) and (R) input signals are  
sent to the Zone 2 audio output connectors. Refer to page  
3-45 for more information.  
Note:  
The numbered items that begin below correspond to  
the rear panel illustration on the next page.  
1. Power Switch  
Connects power to the AC input connector and disconnects  
power from the AC input connector. The c represents the "off"  
position and the|represents the "on" position. When the  
SDP-5 is powered on, the front panel standby button or  
remote control On button can be used to activate and deacti-  
vate standby mode. When the SDP-5 is powered off, standby  
mode is not available.  
Input Connector  
Output Connector  
Front L  
(L)  
(R)  
Front R  
(C)  
Center  
2. AC Input Connector  
(SUB)  
(LS)  
(RS)  
Subwoofer  
Provides power to the SDP-5 through the supplied power cord  
(3 wire, 10 amp, IEC 320).  
Side L and Rear L  
Side R and Rear R  
3. Digital Audio Input Connectors (S/PDIF)  
6. Main Zone Audio Output Connectors  
Provide digital audio input in the Main Zone. Four S/PDIF  
coaxial and four S/PDIF optical (Toslink) input connectors are  
available. These connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1,  
48, 88.2, and 96kHz), Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES) sources.  
These connectors are not compatible with MPEG (MP3) sources.  
Provide analog audio output in the Main Zone. Eight  
connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R, and  
Rear L/R are available.  
4. Digital Audio Output Connector (S/PDIF)  
Provides digital audio output in Zone 2. One S/PDIF coaxial  
connector is available.  
. . . Rear Panel Overview continues on page 2-6  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
Rear Panel Overview (continued from page 2-5)  
12  
3
9
10 11  
15  
1
SDP-5 Digital Surround Processor/Controller  
INPUTS  
3
MAIN  
ZONE 2  
S/PDIF INPUTS  
2
JBL, Inc. Northridge, CA  
Assembled in USA  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
3
2
4
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
TUV  
Y
Y
PR  
PR  
PB  
PB  
Y
PR  
PR  
PB  
PB  
C
US  
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
5
5
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
CAUTION  
S/N  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
Y
3
4
ATTENTION  
RISQUE DE CHOC  
ELECTRIQUE  
OUTPUT  
CENTER  
INPUT 3  
7
NE PAS OUVRIR  
IR IN  
3
6
8
FRONT  
SIDE  
REAR  
AUDIO  
TRIGGER  
OUTPUTS  
(L)  
(C)  
(LS)  
(RS)  
(L)  
(R)  
(C)  
(LS)  
(RS)  
L
L
L
S/PDIF  
OUT  
1
2
RS-232  
(R)  
(SUB)  
(SUB)  
R
R
R
SUBWOOFER  
2
1
OUTPUTS  
AC 100-240V ~ 0-60 HZ, 60W  
4
14  
13  
5
6
7
2
Never make or break connections to the  
SDP-5 unless the SDP-5 and all  
associated components are powered off.  
CAUTION  
7.  
Zone 2 Audio Output Connectors  
Provide analog audio output in Zone 2. Two connectors  
labeled Audio are available. Alternatively, these connectors can  
be used to connect a recording device. When the Zone 2 audio  
output connectors are sent to a recording device, it is  
recommended to set the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu  
ZONE PWR ON parameter to +0dB to achieve appropriate  
recording levels. The Zone 2 audio output connectors provide  
variable output levels. Adjusting Zone 2 volume level will affect  
the recording.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
9. Video Input Connectors  
13.RS-232 Connectors  
Provide video input in the Main Zone and Zone 2. Five  
composite video connectors labeled Video 1 to 5, five S-video  
connectors labeled S-Video 1 to 5, and three component video  
connectors labeled 1 to 3 are available. The component video  
connectors are not available for Zone 2.  
The RS-232 connector labeled 1 provides serial control. It is  
capable of performing configuration downloads and flash  
memory software upgrades. The RS-232 connector labeled 2 is  
capable of supporting future developments.  
14.Trigger Output Connectors  
Provide 12V DC output to control connected components.  
Two trigger output connectors are available on a 5-pin DIN  
connector. The connector labeled PWR – the power trigger  
output connector – is not configurable. It is activated when the  
SDP-5 is activated, and deactivated when the SDP-5 is  
deactivated. The trigger output connector labeled 1 can be  
configured for remote or program operation. Refer to page  
3-54 for more information.  
10.Main Zone Video Output Connectors  
Provide video output in the Main Zone. One composite video  
connector, one S-video connector, and one component video  
connector are available.  
11.Zone 2 Video Output Connectors  
Provide video output in Zone 2. One composite video  
connector and one S-video connector are available.  
Alternatively, these connectors can be used to connect a video  
recording device.  
GROUND  
TRIGGER 2  
GROUND  
TRIGGER 1  
POWER TRIGGER  
Note:  
Composite video output connectors are available  
when a composite or S-video source is present.  
Note:  
S-video output connectors are available when an  
S-video source is present.  
The default trigger configuration shown on page  
3-55 includes settings designed for use in JBL  
Synthesis systems with switching transducers for  
listening modes.  
Component video output connectors are available  
when a component video source is present.  
12.IR IN Connector  
15.Removable Access Panels  
Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution  
equipment. One 3.5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/  
Ring connection) or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is  
available.  
Accommodate connectors for emerging technologies.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW  
MAIN MENU  
The SDP-5 remote control provides full operation of the SDP-5,  
performing commands such as menu navigation that are not  
available from the front panel. The command matrix that begins  
on page 2-13 indicates the commands remote control buttons  
perform when each command bank is active. The numbered items  
in the matrix correspond with the remote control illustrations on  
pages 2-13 to 2-16.  
The MAIN MENU shown at the right  
represents the beginning of the menu  
structure. It can be used to open the three  
main menu branches: MODE ADJUST,  
AUDIO CONTROLS, and SETUP. Refer to  
Sections 5, 4, and 3 for information about  
these menu branches.  
MAIN MENU  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
Refer to the Menu Navigation table on the next page for  
instructions to open and close the MAIN MENU.  
OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS  
The bulleted items that begin below describe factors that can  
improve or impede remote control operation. It is recommended  
to observe these items as well as the battery installation instructions  
on page 1-5 before operating the remote control.  
MENU NAVIGATION  
The remote control Menu arrows must be used to navigate the  
extensive menu structure shown in the Appendix (A-4 to A-13).  
The table on the next page indicates the navigation functions  
remote control Menu arrows perform when the Main Zone  
command bank is activated.  
Please note the following before operating the SDP-5 remote  
control:  
The remote control must be in line-of-sight with the front  
panel IR receiver (2-3). Eliminate obstructions between the  
remote control and the IR receiver. The remote control might  
become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is  
shining on the IR receiver.  
MENU ITEM SELECTION  
The remote control Menu arrows must be used to select menu items.  
For optimal performance, position the remote control at a  
30 degree angle no more than 17 feet (5m) from the SDP-5. If  
the SDP-5 is placed inside a glass cabinet, smoked glass will  
reduce the remote control range.  
To select a menu item on the open menu:  
1. Press the remote control Menu and arrows to highlight  
the desired menu item.  
Remote controllers for different components can interfere with  
one another. It is recommended to avoid using remote controls  
for different components at the same time.  
2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the Menu ꢂ  
arrow to select the highlighted item. If an option is selected,  
another menu will open. If a parameter is selected, a parameter  
drop-down menu will open.  
The remote control batteries should be replaced as needed.  
Refer to page 1-5 for battery installation instructions.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
Arrow  
Navigation Function(s)  
When a menu is open, pressing the Menu arrow selects the highlighted menu item, which opens another menu,  
opens a parameter drop-down menu, or selects the highlighted parameter setting.  
When no menus are open, pressing the Menu arrow opens the MAIN MENU (2-9).  
When a menu is open, pressing the Menu arrow closes the menu and, in most cases, opens the previous menu.  
Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU (2-9) is  
closed. When the MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.  
When no menus are open, pressing the Menu arrow performs no function.  
When a parameter drop-down menu (next page) is open, pressing the Menu arrow selects the current setting and  
closes the drop-down menu.  
When a menu is open, pressing the Menu and arrows scrolls upward () and downward () through the complete  
list of menu items. The highlighted menu item appears on the front panel display. All menu items appear on the  
on-screen display. A scroll bar appears on the right side of the on-screen display when menu items exceed the on-screen  
display top and bottom margins. The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu  
item is passed.  
Menu Options  
Parameter Drop-Down Menus  
Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu  
structure. For instance, selecting the MAIN MENU SETUP option  
opens the SETUP menu as shown below.  
Selecting some menu parameters opens a drop-down menu that  
contains a list of available parameter settings. For instance,  
selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu CUSTOM NAME parameter  
(3-48) opens the drop-down menu shown below, which can be  
used to select the ON or OFF setting.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
ON  
OFF  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
OFF  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
Menu Parameters  
Selecting a menu parameter opens a drop-down menu or horizontal  
bar graph that can be used to select the desired setting.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph:  
To select the desired setting on a parameter drop-down menu:  
1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the remote control  
Menu and arrows to scroll upward and downward  
through the complete list of available settings. The current  
setting appears beneath the parameter name on the on-screen  
and front panel displays.  
1. When the horizontal bar graph appears, press the remote  
control Menu and arrows to increase and decrease the  
setting in designated increments. The current setting appears  
at the right of the parameter name on the on-screen and front  
panel displays.  
2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter  
name, press the Menu arrow to select the setting and close  
the drop-down menu.  
2. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the  
Menu arrow to select the setting and close the horizontal  
bar graph.  
Note:  
Horizontal Bar Graphs  
Menu item selection instructions differ for certain  
menus. These instances are noted throughout this  
user guide.  
Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph,  
which indicates the position at which the current parameter setting  
falls within the entire parameter range. The current setting appears  
at the right of the parameter name on the on-screen and front  
panel displays.  
For instance, selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu A/V SYNC DELAY  
parameter opens the horizontal bar graph shown below, which can  
be used to adjust the amount of audio delay.  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
OFF  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu REMOTE STATE parameter (3-51)  
controls the remote control command bank indicator that appears  
on the on-screen display. When the REMOTE STATE parameter is set  
to ON, a command bank indicator appears in the top-right corner  
of the on-screen display to indicate the last command bank from  
which the SDP-5 received a command. When the REMOTE STATE  
parameter is set to OFF, no command bank indicator appears on  
the on-screen display.  
COMMAND BANK ACTIVATION  
Remote control buttons perform different commands depending  
on whether the Main Zone, Zone 2, or Shift command bank is  
activated. The Main Zone command bank does not need to be  
activated. It remains activated unless the Zone 2 or Shift command  
bank is activated. Pressing and holding the remote control Zone 2  
button activates the Zone 2 command bank, and pressing and  
holding the remote control Shift button activates the Shift  
command bank.  
A "Z" appears when a command from the Zone 2 command bank  
was received last. An "S" appears when a command from the Shift  
command bank was received last. No letter appears when a  
command from the Main Zone command bank was received last.  
The Zone 2 and Shift buttons themselves do not send commands  
to the SDP-5. When pressed and held, these buttons activate the  
associated command bank. For instance, pressing the remote  
control Off button deactivates the SDP-5. Pressing and holding the  
Zone 2 button while pressing the Off button deactivates Zone 2.  
And, pressing and holding the Shift button while pressing the Off  
button deactivates the Main Zone.  
COMMAND MATRIX  
The command matrix that begins on the next page describes the  
commands remote control buttons perform when each command  
bank is active. The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustrations  
that also begin on the next page correspond to the numbered  
items in the matrix.  
To activate the Zone 2 or Shift command bank:  
1. Press and hold the remote control Zone 2 button to activate  
the Zone 2 command bank or press and hold the Shift button  
to activate the Shift command bank.  
2. While holding the selected button, press the desired remote  
control button to send the associated command to the SDP-5.  
The command matrix that begins on the next page describes  
the commands remote control buttons perform when each  
command bank is active.  
3. Release the Zone 2 or Shift button to deactivate the associated  
command bank.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
2
1
5
6
Button  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
Shift  
4
Deactivates standby mode  
and activates the SDP-5.  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Off  
On  
On  
1
3
Blue  
OSD  
Stat  
FP  
Activates standby mode and Deactivates Zone 2.  
deactivates the SDP-5.  
Deactivates the Main Zone.  
Off  
2
Menu ꢃ  
Shift  
Zone 2  
Toggles the FRONT PANEL  
DISPLAY menu STATUS  
parameter between ALWAYS BALANCE parameter (4-6).  
OFF and its current setting  
(3-52).  
Centers the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu ZONE2  
Centers the AUDIO  
7
8
FP  
3
CONTROLS menu Main  
Zone BALANCE and FADER  
parameters (4-6).  
Toggles the ON-SCREEN  
DISPLAY menu  
BACKGROUND parameter  
Sets the AUDIO CONTROLS  
menu BASS, TREBLE, and  
TILT EQ parameters to  
Deactivates the trigger  
output connector labeled 1  
when the connector is  
configured for remote  
operation (3-54).  
Light  
Blue  
4
between ON and OFF (3-51). +0.0dB (4-2 and 4-4).  
Mute  
Toggles the ON-SCREEN  
DISPLAY menu STATUS  
parameter between ALWAYS  
OFF and its current setting  
(3-49).  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Activates the trigger output  
connector labeled 1 when  
the connector configured for  
remote operation (3-54).  
OSD  
5
DVD1  
TV  
VCR  
DVD2  
CD  
Sat  
Aux  
Tuner  
Displays the Main Zone two- Displays the Zone 2 two-line Toggles between opening  
line status for 2 seconds  
(2-18).  
Stat  
6
status for 2 seconds (2-18).  
and closing the STATUS  
menu for the current input  
source (2-18).  
ning  
Activates an additional bank of commands that control the Main Zone. Refer to the previous  
page for more information.  
Shift  
7
Music  
2 CH  
TV  
7/5  
Activates a bank of commands that control Zone 2. Refer to the previous page for more  
information.  
Zone 2  
8
SDP-5  
The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustration shown at the left correspond to the numbered items in the  
matrix above.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
Button  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
Shift  
Increase () and decrease  
() the output level of the  
Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Subwoofer  
as applied to the activated  
listening mode (2-7).  
Adjust the AUDIO  
Scroll upward () and  
downward () through  
menu items (2-10).  
Off  
FP  
On  
9
CONTROLS menu Main  
Zone FADER parameter  
forward () and backward  
() (4-6).  
Blue  
OSD  
Stat  
9
11  
9
Menu ꢃ  
Shift  
Zone 2  
Adjusts the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu ZONE2  
BALANCE parameter left  
(4-6).  
Adjusts the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu Main  
Zone BALANCE parameter  
left (4-6).  
Closes the current menu  
(2-10).  
10  
10  
12  
Opens the menu structure  
and selects the highlighted  
menu item (2-10).  
Adjusts the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu ZONE2  
BALANCE parameter right  
(4-6).  
Adjusts the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu Main  
Zone BALANCE parameter  
right (4-6).  
11  
Light  
13  
14  
15  
Mute  
Activates the remote control backlight, making remote control buttons more visible in the  
dark.  
12  
Light  
Sets Zone 2 volume level to  
-15dB () or -30dB ().  
Sets Main Zone volume level  
to -15dB () or -30dB ().  
Scrolls to the previous ()  
and the next () available  
Main Zone listening mode  
(5-3).  
DVD1  
TV  
VCR  
13  
14  
DVD2  
CD  
Sat  
Aux  
Tuner  
Increases () and decreases  
Increases () and decreases  
() Main Zone volume level () Zone 2 volume level in  
Increases () and decreases  
() Main Zone volume level  
in 3dB increments.  
ning  
in 1dB increments.  
1dB increments.  
Toggles between lowering  
Main Zone volume level and  
restoring Main Zone volume  
to its original level (3-53).  
Toggles between fully muting Toggles between fully muting  
Music  
2 CH  
TV  
7/5  
Mute  
15  
Zone 2 volume level and  
restoring Zone 2 volume to  
its original level.  
Main Zone volume level and  
restoring Main Zone volume  
to its original level.  
SDP-5  
The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustration shown at the left correspond to the numbered items in the  
matrix above.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
Button  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
Shift  
Selects the DVD1 input for  
the Main Zone.  
Selects the DVD1 input for  
Zone 2.  
Increases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu BASS  
parameter in 0.5dB  
increments (4-2).  
Off  
On  
DVD1  
16  
Blue  
FP  
OSD  
Stat  
Menu ꢃ  
Shift  
Zone 2  
Selects the DVD2 input for  
the Main Zone.  
Selects the DVD2 input for  
Zone 2.  
Increases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu TREBLE  
parameter in 0.5dB  
increments (4-2).  
DVD2  
Sat  
Selects the Sat input for the  
Main Zone.  
Selects the Sat input for  
Zone 2.  
Increases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu TILT EQ  
parameter in 0.2dB  
increments (4-4).  
Light  
Mute  
Selects the VCR input for the Selects the VCR input for  
Sets the AUDIO CONTROLS  
menu LOUDNESS parameter  
to ON (4-4).  
VCR  
TV  
Main Zone.  
Zone 2.  
Selects the TV input for the  
Main Zone.  
Selects the TV input for  
Zone 2.  
Decreases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu BASS  
parameter in 0.5dB  
increments (4-2).  
DVD1  
TV  
VCR  
DVD2  
CD  
Sat  
16  
Aux  
Tuner  
Selects the CD input for the  
Main Zone.  
Selects the CD input for  
Zone 2.  
Decreases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu TREBLE  
parameter in 0.5dB  
increments (4-2).  
CD  
Tuner  
Aux  
ning  
Selects the Tuner input for  
the Main Zone.  
Selects the Tuner input for  
Zone 2.  
Decreases the AUDIO  
CONTROLS menu TILT EQ  
parameter in 0.2dB  
increments (4-4).  
Music  
2 CH  
TV  
7/5  
SDP-5  
Selects the Aux input for the Selects the Aux input for  
Main Zone. Zone 2.  
Sets the AUDIO CONTROLS  
menu LOUDNESS parameter  
to OFF (4-4).  
The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustration shown at the left correspond to the numbered items in the  
matrix above.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
Button  
17  
Main Zone  
Zone 2  
Shift  
Selects the LOGIC7 Film  
mode family for the current  
input source (5-3).  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Selects the PANORAMA listening  
mode (5-11).  
Off  
FP  
On  
Blue  
OSD  
Stat  
Selects the Dolby mode family  
for the current input source  
(5-3).  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Refer to the next page.  
Refer to the next page.  
Refer to the next page.  
Menu ꢃ  
Shift  
Zone 2  
Selects the dts(-ES) mode  
family for the current input  
source (5-3).  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Light  
Selects the THX mode family  
for the current input source  
(5-3).  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Mute  
Selects the LOGIC7 Music  
mode family for the current  
input source (5-3).  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Selects the L7 MUSIC SURR listening  
mode (5-5).  
Music  
TV  
DVD1  
TV  
Selects the LOGIC7 TV mode  
family for the current input  
source (5-3).  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Selects the MONO LOGIC listening  
mode (5-14) for 2-channel input  
sources and the 5.1 MONO LOGIC  
listening mode (5-20) for 5.1-channel  
input sources.  
VCR  
DVD2  
CD  
Sat  
Aux  
Tuner  
Toggles between 7- and  
5-channel playback. Refer to  
page 3-34 for more  
information.  
Reserved for future  
possibilities.  
Adjusts the MAIN ADV menu INPUT  
SELECT parameter, cycling through  
the ANALOG, DIGITAL, and AUTO  
settings (3-18).  
ning  
7/5  
18  
17  
19  
18  
Music  
2 CH  
TV  
7/5  
Toggles between the activated Reserved for future  
Toggles the MAIN ADV menu 2-CH  
ANLG BYP parameter between ON  
and OFF (3-20).  
2 CH  
19  
listening mode and the  
2-CHANNEL listening mode  
(5-13).  
possibilities.  
SDP-5  
The numbers in the SDP-5 remote control illustration shown at the left correspond to the numbered items in the  
matrix above.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
Shift-DOLBY  
UNDERSTANDING THE ZONES  
The SDP-5 features two zones of operation, called the Main Zone  
and Zone 2. The Main Zone controls audio and video sources in  
the primary listening space. Zone 2 controls audio and video  
sources in the secondary listening space.  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the  
remote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital input source is present activates the DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
or DOLBY DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses toggle  
the EX DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON,  
and OFF settings.  
The Main Zone and Zone 2 have separate digital audio receivers  
and dedicated analog input source selectors that allow for  
independent input selection in each zone. For instance, the SDP-5  
can play a DVD in the Main Zone and a CD in Zone 2 at the same  
time.  
Shift-dts  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the  
remote control dts button while a dts(-ES) input source is  
present toggles the ES DECODING parameter, cycling through  
the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.  
The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:  
1. The same Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) input source can be  
selected for the Main Zone and Zone 2 at the same time.  
However, different Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) input sources  
cannot be present in both zones at the same time.  
Shift-THX  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the  
remote control THX button while a 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
input source is present activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX ULTRA2,  
or 5.1 THX SurEX listening mode. Refer to page 5-17 for more  
information.  
2. Zone 2 can provide a 2-channel downmix of Main Zone multi-  
channel audio when all of the following conditions are met:  
The same input must be selected in the Main Zone and  
Zone 2.  
A Dolby Digital or dts(-ES) input source must be present in  
the Main Zone.  
The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter must be set  
to DMIX (3-24).  
3. The Zone 2 audio output connectors are not available when  
the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated in the Main Zone  
and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to ANLG. However, it is  
possible to have a 5.1-channel analog input source present in  
the Main Zone and a digital input source present in Zone 2.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
TWO-LINE STATUS  
Zone 2 Two-Line Status  
The two-line status provides information about the zone from  
which the SDP-5 last detected a change in status. The Main Zone  
two-line status appears when the SDP-5 detects a Main Zone  
change, and the Zone 2 two-line status appears when the SDP-5  
detects a Zone 2 change.  
The Zone 2 two-line status shown at the right  
indicates the current input, input source, and  
volume level selected in Zone 2. It appears on  
the on-screen and front panel displays when the SDP-5 detects a  
Zone 2 change.  
DVD1  
ZONE2  
%!D  
VOL  
-37dB  
The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS (3-49) parameter can be  
used to control the length of time for which the two-line status  
appears on the on-screen display. The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu  
POSITION parameter (3-50) can be used to control the position of  
the two-line status on the on-screen display.  
STATUS MENUS  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote  
control Stat button opens the STATUS menu for the current input  
source, which contains parameters that provide information about  
the current input source and listening mode. STATUS menus are  
available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), and analog input  
sources.  
Note:  
When the display device is connected to a component  
video output connector and the MAIN ADV menu  
COMPONENT OSD parameter (3-23) is set to OFF,  
the display device does not show the on-screen  
display, including the two-line status.  
Unlike most other menus, STATUS menus cannot be opened  
through the selection of menu options. Rather, the remote control  
Shift, Stat command must be performed.  
To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input  
source:  
Main Zone Two-Line Status  
1. Press and hold the remote control Shift button.  
The Main Zone two-line status shown at the  
right indicates the current input, listening  
mode, input source, and volume level selected  
in the Main Zone. It appears on the on-screen and front panel  
displays when the SDP-5 detects a Main Zone change.  
DVD1  
L7 FILM  
%!D  
VOL  
-37dB  
2. While holding the Shift button, press the remote control Stat  
button. The first page of the STATUS menu for the current  
input source will appear on the on-screen and front panel  
displays.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
If the STATUS menu includes a second page, the PG1 indicator  
appears in the top-right corner of the menu. While the Shift  
command bank is activated, press the Stat button to open the  
second page. If the STATUS menu does not include a  
second page, pressing the Stat button closes the menu. If this  
occurs, begin again with step 1.  
STATUS menus  
2CH STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
%!D STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
PG1  
%!D STATUS  
PG2  
SAMPLE RATE  
2.0 ENCODING  
DIALOG OFFSET  
MIX ROOM  
CENTER MIX LVL  
SURR MIX LVL  
EX ENCODING  
dB  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
0
-6  
-15  
-30  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3. When the desired STATUS menu page has been opened,  
release the Shift button to deactivate the Shift command bank.  
Then, press the remote control Menu and arrows to scroll  
upward and downward through the complete list of  
parameters available on the current page. When the Shift  
command bank is activated, the Menu arrows cannot be  
used to scroll through STATUS menu parameters.  
-45  
-45  
DTS-ES STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
PG1  
DTS-ES STATUS  
WORD LENGTH  
SAMPLE RATE  
PG2  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
ESI ENCODING  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
Note:  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
STATUS menu parameters provide information about  
the current input source and listening mode. These  
parameters cannot be adjusted.  
-45  
2CH BYPASS STATUS  
DIGITAL STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
4. Press the Stat button or the Menu arrow to close the  
STATUS menu. If the second page of the STATUS menu opens,  
press the Stat button or the Menu arrow again to close the  
STATUS menu.  
All STATUS menus are shown at the right. STATUS menu  
descriptions begin on the next page. The table beneath each  
description lists the default and possible settings for each  
parameter. STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page  
2-22. STATUS menu level meters are described on page 2-23.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
2CH STATUS  
DOLBY D STATUS  
Provides information about 2-channel input sources.  
Features L and R level meters (2-23).  
Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources.  
Features L, C, R, SL, SR, and SUB level meters (2-23).  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
Parameter  
Possible Settings  
The selected input  
The activated listening mode  
3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0  
32 to 640kbps  
The selected input  
INPUT  
MODE  
The activated listening mode  
ANLG, PCM  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.  
EX ENCODING  
SAMPLE RATE  
2.0 ENCODING  
DIALOG OFFSET  
MIX ROOM  
CENTER MIX LVL  
SURR MIX LVL  
ON, OFF  
48kHz  
MATRIX, NONE  
-27 to +4dB  
SMALL, LARGE  
-3.0dB, -4.5dB, -6.0dB  
+0.0dB, -3.0dB, -6.0dB  
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
dts(-ES) STATUS  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS  
Provides information about dts(-ES) input sources.  
Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources.  
Features L, C, R, SL, SR, SB, and SUB level meters (2-23). The  
SB level meter appears when a 6.1-channel input source is  
present, or when a 5.1-channel input source is present and the  
ES DECODING parameter (5-30) is set to ON.  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
The selected input  
5.1a BYPASS  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.  
BYPASS  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
The selected input  
MODE  
The activated listening mode  
3/3.1, 3/2.1  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
754.5 to 1509.7kbps  
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF  
16bits, 20bits, 24bits  
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
ES ENCODING  
WORD LENGTH  
SAMPLE RATE  
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
2CH BYPASS STATUS  
DIGITAL STATUS  
Provides information about 2-channel analog input sources  
when the MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set  
to ON.  
Provides information about digital input sources for which a  
sample rate is detected, but no audio is present in the input  
signal.  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
The selected input  
2CH BYPASS  
Parameter  
INPUT  
Possible Settings  
The selected input  
The activated listening mode  
---  
MODE  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.  
BYPASS  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-22.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3/2.1, 3/2,  
3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, and 1/0. Current settings for dts(-ES) input  
sources include 3/3.1 and 3/2.1.  
STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS  
2.0 ENCODING  
MATRIX, NONE  
Indicates whether or not a matrix-encoded source is detected.  
When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix-encoded source is  
detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix-encoded  
source is not detected. The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect  
matrix encoding in non-flagged input sources.  
DIALOG OFFSET  
-27 to +4dB  
Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.  
Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below  
full-scale (-27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the  
incoming signal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter  
indicates the amount of adjustment the SDP-5 makes to normalize  
dialog to -27dBFS.  
BIT RATE  
32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbps  
Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bit  
rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding  
process. Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32  
to 640 kbps. Possible settings for dts(-ES) sources range from 754  
to 1509.7kbps.  
ES ENCODING  
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF  
Indicates whether or not a dts-ES-encoded source is detected.  
When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channel  
dts-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX,  
a 5.1-channel dts-ES source with a surround-encoded back channel  
is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard dts  
source with no dts-ES encoding is detected.  
CENTER MIX LVL  
-3.0dB, -4.5dB, -6.0dB  
Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used  
during the mixing process.  
EX ENCODING  
ON, OFF  
CHANNELS  
3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0  
Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded  
source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a  
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital  
Surround EX is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a  
standard 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby  
Digital Surround EX-encoding is detected. The SDP-5 cannot  
automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non-  
flagged input sources. Refer to page 5-19 for more information.  
Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. The  
first digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digit  
after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.  
The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (low  
frequency effects) information. For instance, if the parameter  
setting is 3/2.1, an input source with three front channels, two  
surround channels, and LFE information is present. LFE information  
is sent to the Main Zone audio output connector labeled  
Subwoofer.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SDP-5  
INPUT  
WORD LENGTH  
16bits, 20bits, 24bits  
Indicates the selected input (i.e. DVD1).  
Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input  
signal.  
INPUT TYPE  
ANLG, BYP, PCM, ---  
STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS  
Indicates the input source that is present. When the parameter  
setting is ANLG, a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the  
MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter (3-20) is set to OFF.  
When the parameter setting is BYP (Bypass), a 2-channel analog  
audio source is present and the 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to  
ON. When the parameter setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audio  
source is present. When the parameter setting is ---, an unknown  
digital audio source is present.  
Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating  
input levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround  
left (SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB), and subwoofer  
(SUB) channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both  
analog and digital input sources. For instance, the level meters  
indicate digital audio input levels when a digital audio source is  
present.  
Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS  
menu, depending on the source that is present. The SB level meter  
appears when a 6.1-channel source is present, or when a  
5.1-channel source is present and the ES DECODING parameter  
(5-30) is set to ON.  
MIX ROOM  
SMALL, LARGE  
Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the  
mixing process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, it is  
recommended to set the RE-EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for  
THX listening modes.  
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow, and red  
when the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen  
background. Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal  
levels, and red indicates high levels and the onset of overload. Level  
meters appear in white when the on-screen display is not  
configured for a blue-screen background.  
MODE  
Indicates the activated listening mode (i.e. L7 FILM).  
SAMPLE RATE  
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz  
Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.  
SURR MIX LVL  
+0.0dB, -3.0dB, -6.0dB  
Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during  
the mixing process.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
JBL Synthesis  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
SETUP  
SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
INPUT SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Changing Input Names (NAME) • Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors •  
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes • Configuring Advanced Zone Settings  
SPEAKER SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26  
Custom Speaker Setups • THX Speaker Setups • Measuring Speaker Distances •  
Calibrating Output Levels  
REAR PANEL CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45  
DISPLAY SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47  
On-Screen Display Setup • Front Panel Display Setup  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53  
TRIGGER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54  
LOCK OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
Selecting the MAIN MENU SETUP option opens the SETUP menu as  
shown below. SETUP menu option descriptions begin below and  
continue throughout this section.  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
Opens the REAR PANEL CONFIG menu, which can be used to  
configure the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo  
connectors, one 5.1-channel and five stereo connectors, or two  
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors. Refer to page 3-45 for  
more information.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
DISPLAYS  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which can be used to customize  
the on-screen and front panel displays, restore audio/video  
synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name. Refer  
to page 3-47 for more information.  
INPUTS  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
Prompts the selection of the desired input (i.e. DVD1). Selecting an  
input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu, which can be  
used to change input names, assign audio and video input  
connectors, select preferred listening modes, and configure  
advanced Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings. Refer to the next  
page for more information.  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which can be used to  
configure Main Zone and Zone 2 volume levels. Refer to page 3-53  
for more information.  
SPEAKERS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
TRIGGER  
Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which can be used to configure  
the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker  
setup, set speaker distances, and calibrate output levels. Refer to  
page 3-26 for more information.  
SETUP  
TRIGGER  
Opens the TRIGGER SETUP menu, which can be used to configure  
the trigger output connector labeled 1. Refer to page 3-54 for  
more information.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
VCR INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
TUNER INPUT SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
DVD1  
VCR  
NONE  
NAME  
TUNER  
NONE  
ANALOG-4  
+0dB  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
ANALOG-2  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-4  
NONE  
+0dB  
Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which can be used to lock and  
unlock settings in the MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS, and  
SETUP menu branches. Refer to page 3-56 for more information.  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
NONE  
NONE  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
L7 FILM  
L7 MUSIC  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
%!D  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
ANLG  
ZONE2 IN  
ANLG  
INPUT SETUP  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
(INPUT)  
INPUT SETUP  
Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of  
the desired input (i.e. DVD1) as shown below. Selecting an input  
opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown at the right,  
which can be used to change input names, assign audio and video  
input connectors, select preferred listening modes, and configure  
advanced Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.  
DVD2 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
TV INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
AUX INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DVD2  
TV  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-2  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
OPTICAL-2  
ANALOG-3  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-5  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
OPTICAL-3  
NONE  
+0dB  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-2  
2
L7 FILM  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-2  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
NONE  
L7 TV  
5.1 L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
%!D  
%!D  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM-  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
ANLG  
DIGITAL  
CD  
LOCK OPTIONS  
TUNER  
AUX  
SAT INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
CD INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
All INPUT SETUP menus are shown at the right. The parameters on  
the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of  
which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side  
are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to  
input. The INPUT SETUP menus to the right indicate factory-default  
parameter settings for each input.  
SAT  
CD  
COAX-3  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
OPTICAL-1  
ANALOG-1  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-3  
3
+0dB  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
NONE  
L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
%!D  
5.1 L7 TV  
%!D  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
ANLG  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
CHANGING INPUT NAMES (NAME)  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
NAME  
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu shown below, which can be used to customize or restore  
the factory-default name of the selected input. Factory-default input names correspond to front panel and remote control input selection  
button labels.  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT NAME  
DVD1 EDIT INPUT NAME  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
^
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT  
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS  
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
NONE  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
3. When the desired character has been selected, press the Menu  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
arrow to advance to the next character space. Press the  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
NAME  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
Menu arrow to return to the previous character space. The  
cursor will automatically wrap to the first character space when  
the last character space is passed.  
Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu shown above,  
which can be used to customize the name of the selected input.  
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired input name.  
To customize the name of the selected input:  
5. When the desired input name has been entered, press the  
Menu arrow to close the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down  
menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu.  
1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT  
INPUT NAME drop-down menu.  
2. When the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu opens, press  
the remote control Menu and arrows to change the  
character above the cursor (^).  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
PRESS MENU V TO  
DVD1 EDIT INPUT NAME RESTORE INPUT NAME  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT NAME  
DVD1  
NAME  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
NONE  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 FILM  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
%!D  
LOCK OPTIONS  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
The custom input name appears on the on-screen and front panel  
displays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear  
on the input selection menu that opens when the SETUP menu  
INPUTS option is selected. The custom input name appears against  
the left margin of the on-screen display, and the factory-default  
input name appears in parentheses against the right margin of the  
on-screen display.  
To restore the factory-default name of the selected input:  
1. Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path to open the  
INPUT NAME menu.  
2. When the INPUT NAME menu opens, press the remote control  
Menu and arrows to highlight the RESTORE DEFAULT  
NAME option.  
3. When the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option is highlighted,  
press the Menu arrow to select this option. The message  
“PRESS MENU V TO RESTORE INPUT NAME” appears on the  
on-screen and front panel displays.  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
NAME  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
Restores the factory-default name of the selected input. Factory-  
default input names correspond to front panel and remote control  
input selection button labels.  
4. When this message opens, press the Menu arrow to restore  
the factory-default name of the selected input and close the  
message. (Press the Menu arrow to close the message  
without restoring the factory-default name of the selected  
input.)  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
ASSIGNING AUDIO & VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1  
NAME  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
COAX-1  
NONE  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
The SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be  
assigned to its eight digital audio, eight analog audio, five  
composite video, five S-video, or three component video input  
connectors. The table below lists the INPUT SETUP menu  
parameters that can be used to assign audio and video input  
connectors. The ANLG IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust  
analog audio input levels for the selected input. These parameters  
are highlighted on the INPUT SETUP menu shown above.  
Parameter  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
Possible Settings  
COAX-1 to 4, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONE  
ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8),  
NONE  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
AUTO, -18 to +12dB  
COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 5, NONE  
COMPONENT 1 to 3, NONE  
COMPONENT IN  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 DIGITAL IN  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 COAX-1  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
COAX-2  
COAX-3  
COAX-4  
OPTICAL-1  
OPTICAL-2  
OPTICAL-3  
OPTICAL-4  
NONE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
Please note the following:  
DIGITAL IN  
COAX-1 to 4, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONE  
When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the SDP-5  
will automatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT  
parameter to ANALOG (3-18).  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
DIGITAL IN  
Opens the DIGITAL IN menu shown above, which can be used to  
assign a digital audio input connector for the selected input. The  
SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned  
to any of its eight digital audio input connectors.  
A digital audio input connector must be assigned when no  
analog audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the next  
page for information about assigning an analog audio input  
connector.  
Note:  
The digital audio input connectors are compatible  
with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96kHz), Dolby  
Digital, and dts(-ES) sources. The digital audio input  
connectors are not compatible with MPEG (MP3)  
sources.  
. . . Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors continues on page 3-8  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors (continued from page 3-7)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 ANALOG IN  
DVD1 ANALOG IN  
DVD1 ANALOG IN  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 ANALOG-1  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
ANALOG-1  
ANALOG-2  
ANALOG-3  
ANALOG-4  
ANALOG-5  
5.1 ANLG (6-8)  
NONE  
ANALOG-1  
ANALOG-2  
5.1 ANLG (3-5)  
5.1 ANLG (6-8)  
NONE  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
ANALOG-2  
ANALOG-3  
ANALOG-4  
ANALOG-5  
ANALOG-6  
ANALOG-7  
ANALOG-8  
NONE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
LOCK OPTIONS  
C
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
B
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
A
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
The ANALOG IN menu labeled C (above) appears when the  
REAR PANEL CONFIG menu 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG (3-46) option  
is selected.  
ANALOG IN ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), NONE  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANALOG IN  
Opens the ANALOG IN menu shown above, which can be used to  
assign an analog audio input connector for the selected input. The  
SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned  
to any of its eight analog audio input connectors.  
Please note the following:  
When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the SDP-5  
will automatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT  
parameter to DIGITAL (3-18).  
The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the  
configuration of the analog audio input connectors.  
An analog audio input connector must be assigned when no  
digital audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the previous  
page for information about assigning a digital audio input  
connector.  
The ANALOG IN menu labeled A (above) appears when the  
REAR PANEL CONFIG menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option (3-45) is  
selected.  
The ANALOG IN menu labeled B (above) appears when the  
REAR PANEL CONFIG menu 5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG option (3-45)  
is selected.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 AUTO  
OFF ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
MANUAL  
+0dB  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
A+U0TdOB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
AUTO GAIN  
+0.0dB  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
LOCK OPTIONS  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
-45  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
ANLG IN LVL  
AUTO  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANLG IN LVL  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANLG IN LVL  
AUTO  
Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu shown above, which can be used to  
adjust 2-channel analog audio input levels for the selected input.  
Despite attempts at standardization, analog audio sources have a  
wide range of levels. To compensate for this, the SDP-5 allows  
independent input level adjustment for each of its stereo analog  
audio input connectors. Input level adjustment is not available  
for either of the 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors.  
Provides automatic adjustment of 2-channel analog audio input  
levels. When set to ON, the SDP-5 automatically monitors and  
optimizes input levels. When the input signal is too high, the SDP-5  
quickly decreases input levels to avoid overload. When the input  
signal is too low, the SDP-5 slowly increases input levels to maximize  
the signal-to-noise ratio and dynamic range.  
When the AUTO parameter is set to OFF, the SDP-5 does not  
provide automatic adjustment of 2-channel analog audio input  
levels. Rather, input levels must be adjusted with the ANLG IN LVL  
MANUAL parameter (next page).  
Note:  
Adjustments made on the ANLG IN LVL menu are  
applied to the stereo analog audio input connector  
assigned for the selected input. When another stereo  
analog audio input connector is assigned, these  
adjustments are automatically applied to the new  
connector.  
. . . Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors continues on page 3-10  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors (continued from page 3-9)  
-18 to +12dB  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 AUTO  
OFF ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
MANUAL  
+0dB  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
A+U0TdOB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
AUTO GAIN  
+0.0dB  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
LOCK OPTIONS  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
-45  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
MANUAL  
-18 to +12dB  
AUTO GAIN  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANLG IN LVL  
MANUAL  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANLG IN LVL  
AUTO GAIN  
Provides manual adjustment of 2-channel analog audio input levels.  
When manual adjustments are made, the SDP-5 automatically sets  
the ANLG IN LVL menu AUTO parameter to OFF and deactivates  
automatic input level adjustment. Manual input level adjustments  
are retained when the AUTO parameter is set to ON.  
Indicates the current amount of input level adjustment for the  
selected stereo analog audio input connector. When the ANLG IN  
LVL menu AUTO parameter is set to ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter  
indicates the amount of automatic input level adjustment. When  
the AUTO parameter is set to OFF, the AUTO GAIN parameter  
indicates the amount of manual input level adjustment. (In other  
words, the AUTO GAIN parameter reflects the setting of the ANLG  
IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter.)  
Note:  
When the AUTO parameter is set to ON, the SDP-5  
will not make adjustments that exceed the ANLG IN  
LVL menu MANUAL parameter setting.  
When the AUTO parameter is set to ON, the AUTO GAIN  
parameter continues to indicate the amount of manual input level  
adjustment until automatic adjustments have been made.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
VIDEO IN  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 COMPOSITE-1  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
COMPOSITE-2  
COMPOSITE-3  
COMPOSITE-4  
COMPOSITE-5  
S-VIDEO-1  
S-VIDEO-2  
S-VIDEO-3  
S-VIDEO-4  
S-VIDEO-5  
NONE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
NONE  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
COMPONENT IN  
LOCK OPTIONS  
2-CH  
%!D  
L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
LEVEL METERS  
VIDEO IN  
COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 5, NONE  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ANLG IN LVL  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
VIDEO IN  
Indicate fluctuating input levels in the front left (L) and front right  
(R) channels for the selected input. These level meters are also  
included on the STATUS menus, allowing them to indicate input  
levels for both analog and digital audio input sources. However,  
ANLG IN LVL menu input level adjustments only affect 2-channel  
analog audio input sources.  
Opens the VIDEO IN menu shown above, which can be used to  
assign a composite or S-video input connector for the selected  
input. The SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can  
be assigned to any of its five composite or five S-video input  
connectors.  
Please note the following:  
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow, and red  
when the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen back-  
ground. Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal levels,  
and red indicates the onset of overload. Level meters appear in  
white when the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-  
screen background.  
Composite video output connectors are available when a  
composite or S-video source is present.  
S-video output connectors are available when an S-video  
source is present.  
Component video output connectors are available when a  
component video source is present.  
. . . Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors continues on page 3-12  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Assigning Audio & Video Input Connectors (continued from page 3-11)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 COMPONENT  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 COMPONENT 1  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
COMPONENT 2  
COMPONENT 3  
NONE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
NONE  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
1
LOCK OPTIONS  
L7 FILM  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
COMPONENT IN  
COMPONENT 1 to 3, NONE  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
COMPONENT IN  
Opens the COMPONENT menu shown above, which can be used  
to assign a component video input connector for the selected  
input. The SDP-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can  
be assigned to any of its 3 component video input connectors.  
Please note the following:  
Composite video output connectors are available when a  
composite or S-video source is present.  
S-video output connectors are available when an S-video  
source is present.  
Component video output connectors are available when a  
component video source is present.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1  
NAME  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
COAX-1  
NONE  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
LOCK OPTIONS  
DDD  
5.1 L7 FILM  
dDtTsS-EESS DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
The INPUT SETUP menus include three preferred listening mode  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
CD INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
DVD1  
CD  
COAX-3  
NONE  
selection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, and dts-ES. These  
parameters can be used to select a preferred listening mode for  
2-channel, Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES) input sources. The SDP-5  
automatically activates the selected listening mode whenever a  
new input is selected or a new input source is present.  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
+0dB  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
NONE  
L7 MUSIC  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
%!D  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
For example, the preferred listening mode selection parameters on  
the DVD1 and CD INPUT SETUP menus are set as shown at the  
right.  
If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is present,  
the SDP-5 activates the L7 FILM listening mode. If a Dolby  
Digital source becomes present, the SDP-5 automatically  
activates the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode.  
If the DVD1 input is selected and a dts(-ES) source is present,  
the SDP-5 activates the dts(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode. If the  
CD input is selected and a 2-channel source is present, the  
SDP-5 automatically activates the L7 MUSIC listening mode.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes (continued from page 3-13)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 2-CH MODE  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 L7 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COAX-1  
NONE  
L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
%!PLII + THX  
%!PLII MOVIE  
%!PLII MUSIC  
%!PRO LOGIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
COMPONENT IN  
LOCK OPTIONS  
2-CH  
%!D  
L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
PARTY  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example  
throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substituted. Likewise,  
whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
USE LAST  
When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST:  
2-CH  
The SDP-5 will not automatically activate the 2-CHANNEL  
listening mode if the remote control 2 CH button was used to  
activate the 2-CHANNEL listening mode the last time a  
2-channel source was present. Instead, it will activate the  
2-channel listening mode (i.e. L7 FILM) that was activated prior  
to the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
2-CH  
Opens the 2-CH MODE menu shown above, which can be used to  
select a preferred listening mode for 2-channel input sources. The  
SDP-5 automatically activates the selected listening mode  
whenever a new input is selected or a new 2-channel source is  
present. When set to USE LAST, the SDP-5 activates the listening  
mode that was activated the last time a 2-channel source was  
present whenever a new input is selected or a new 2-channel  
source is present.  
The SDP-5 will automatically activate a dts NEO:6 listening  
mode if a dts NEO:6 listening mode was activated the last time  
a 2-channel source was present. However, the dts NEO:6  
listening modes cannot be selected as the preferred listening  
mode for 2-channel sources.  
The SDP-5 will not automatically activate a dts NEO:6 listening  
mode unless a 44.1 or 48kHz PCM digital source is present.  
The dts NEO:6 listening modes are not available with 88.2 or  
96kHz, Dolby Digital, or analog sources.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 %!D MODE  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 5.1 L7 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
5.1 L7 TV  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 THX  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
%!DIGITAL  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
LOCK OPTIONS  
DDD  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
USE LAST  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST:  
DOLBY D  
The SDP-5 will automatically activate the 5.1 THX MUSIC  
listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time  
a Dolby Digital source was present. However, the 5.1 THX  
MUSIC listening mode cannot be selected as the preferred  
listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
&&D  
Opens the DOLBY D MODE menu shown above, which can be  
used to select a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input  
sources. The SDP-5 automatically activates the selected listening  
mode whenever a new input is selected or a new Dolby Digital  
source is present. When set to USE LAST, the SDP-5 activates the  
listening mode that was activated the last time a Dolby Digital  
source was present whenever a new input is selected or a new  
Dolby Digital source is present.  
. . . Selecting Preferred Listening Modes continues on page 3-16  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes (continued from page 3-15)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 DTS-ES MODE  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
DTS-ES THX  
DTS-ES  
DTS-ES 2-CHAN  
USE LAST  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
NONE  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
dDtTsS-EESS DdTtSs-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
When the dts-ES parameter is set to USE LAST:  
dts-ES  
The SDP-5 will automatically activate the dts THX MUSIC  
listening mode if this listening mode was activated the last time  
a dts(-ES) source was present. However, the dts THX MUSIC  
listening mode cannot be selected as the preferred listening  
mode for dts(-ES) sources.  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
\
Opens the dts-ES MODE menu shown above, which can be used  
to select a preferred listening mode for dts(-ES) input sources. The  
SDP-5 automatically activates the selected listening mode  
whenever a new input is selected or a new dts(-ES) source is  
present. When set to USE LAST, the SDP-5 activates the listening  
mode that was activated the last time a dts(-ES) source was  
present whenever a new input is selected or a new dts(-ES) source  
is present.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
CONFIGURING ADVANCED ZONE SETTINGS  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
DVD1 INPUT SELECT  
DVD1  
NAME  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
NONE  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
OFF  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
VCR MAIN ADV  
TUNER MAIN ADV  
MAIN ADVANCED  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
ANALOG  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
ANALOG  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opens  
the MAIN ADV menu shown above. The parameters on the left side  
of this menu are identical regardless of which input is selected. The  
settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings  
differ from input to input. The MAIN ADV menus shown at the  
right indicate default parameter settings for each input.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
DVD2 MAIN ADV  
TV MAIN ADV  
AUX MAIN ADV  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
. . . MAIN ADVANCED continues on page 3-18  
SAT MAIN ADV  
CD MAIN ADV  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
MAIN ADVANCED (continued from page 3-17)  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
AUTO  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
OFF  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
INPUT SELECT  
DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO  
Note:  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
INPUT SELECT  
When the INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO,  
the SDP-5 will not select the assigned analog audio  
input connector when a valid digital audio input  
source is present. Some DVD and CD players output  
digital signals (data) when the player is paused or  
stopped or when the player is powered on and the  
disc drawer is empty. When this occurs, the SDP-5  
automatically selects the assigned digital audio input  
connector.  
Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input  
connectors assigned for the selected Main Zone input. The INPUT  
SETUP menu can be used to assign one digital and one analog  
audio input connector for the selected input. Refer to pages 3-7  
and 3-8 for more information.  
When the Shift command bank is activated, the remote control 7/5  
button can be used to adjust the INPUT SELECT parameter, cycling  
through the DIGITAL, ANALOG, and AUTO settings.  
The table shown on the next page describes INPUT SELECT  
parameter settings.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings  
The table below describes INPUT SELECT parameter settings.  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
AUTO  
The SDP-5 automatically sets the INPUT The SDP-5 automatically sets the INPUT The SDP-5 automatically sets the INPUT  
SELECT parameter to DIGITAL when the SELECT parameter to ANALOG when the SELECT parameter to AUTO when both digital  
ANALOG IN parameter is set to NONE.  
DIGITAL IN parameter is set to NONE.  
and analog audio input connectors are  
assigned.  
The SDP-5 sends the assigned digital • The SDP-5 sends the assigned analog  
audio input connector to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors. The SDP-5  
ignores the assigned analog audio input  
connector.  
audio input connector to the Main Zone • The SDP-5 toggles between sending the  
audio output connectors. The SDP-5  
ignores the assigned digital audio input  
connector.  
assigned digital and analog audio input  
connectors to the Main Zone audio output  
connectors based on the input source that  
is present. For example:  
The digital audio input connectors are • The ANALOG IN parameter (3-8) can be  
compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2,  
and 96kHz), Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES)  
sources. If an incompatible digital audio  
source (i.e. MPEG or MP3) is present, the  
SDP-5 automatically selects the assigned  
analog audio input connector.  
used to assign an analog audio input  
connector for the selected input.  
When a 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital,  
or dts(-ES) source is present, the SDP-5  
automatically selects the assigned  
digital audio input connector.  
When an SACD source is present, the  
SDP-5 automatically selects the  
The DIGITAL IN parameter (3-7) can be  
used to assign a digital audio input  
connector for the selected input.  
assigned  
connector.  
analog  
audio  
input  
The AUTO setting is recommended for  
components that generate both digital  
and analog signals, such as DVD/SACD  
players.  
. . . MAIN ADVANCED continues on page 3-20  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
MAIN ADVANCED (continued from page 3-19)  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
2-CHANLGBAYP
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
OFF  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
Allows 2-channel analog audio input sources to bypass A/D  
conversion and internal processing. When set to ON, the SDP-5  
passes analog audio input signals to the corresponding Main Zone  
audio output connectors. When a 5.1-channel analog audio source  
is present, the SDP-5 passes only (L) and (R) analog audio input  
signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front  
L/R. When set to OFF, all analog audio input signals are sent  
through A/D conversion and internal processing before passing to  
the Main Zone audio output connectors.  
Note:  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing  
the remote control 2 CH button toggles the 2-CH  
ANLG BYP parameter setting ON and OFF.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
AUTO  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
OFF  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
AUTO, OFF  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some  
video sources. When set to AUTO, the SDP-5 allows anamorphic  
video input signals to pass through the S-video switcher, enabling  
compatible display devices to automatically switch between  
anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes. When set to OFF,  
the SDP-5 prevents anamorphic video input signals from passing  
through the S-video switcher, preventing compatible display  
devices from automatically switching between anamorphic and  
non-anamorphic display modes.  
. . . MAIN ADVANCED continues on page 3-22  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
MAIN ADVANCED (continued from page 3-21)  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
OFF  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
ON, OFF  
Note:  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
The on-screen display appears horizontally stretched  
across the display device screen when all of the fol-  
lowing conditions are met:  
Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display  
device is connected to an S-video output connector. When set to  
ON, the display device shows the on-screen display in a 4:3 aspect  
ratio* regardless of the incoming signal. When set to OFF, the  
display device shows the on-screen display in the same aspect ratio  
as the input signal.  
The S-VIDEO OSD (4:3) parameter is set to OFF.  
An anamorphic video input signal is present.  
A 16:9 display device (widescreen) is connected  
to an S-video output connector.  
*
Aspect ratio refers to the size of the picture on the display device  
screen or to the size of the display device screen. A 4:3 aspect ratio  
is almost square. A 16:9 aspect ratio, often referred to as  
“widescreen,” is almost twice as wide as high.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 MAIN ADV  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 INPUT SELECT DIGITAL ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
OFF  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
COMPONENT OSD  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
MAIN ADVANCED  
COMPONENT OSD  
Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display  
device is connected to the component video output connector.  
When set to ON, the display device shows the on-screen display as  
a 480i video signal on a full blue-screen background. To minimize  
viewing distractions, the two-line status does not appear on the  
on-screen display. When set to OFF, the display device does not  
show the on-screen display, including the two-line status (2-18).  
Note:  
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND  
parameter (3-51) is set to OFF, the display device  
using the component video output connector will not  
show the on-screen display.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DVD1  
ZONE2 IN  
Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input connectors assigned to the selected Zone 2 input.The INPUT SETUP menu can  
be used to assign one digital and one analog audio input connector for the selected input. Refer to pages 3-7 and 3-8 for more information.  
The table shown on the next page describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.  
DIGITAL  
ANLG  
DMIX  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
DVD1  
NAME  
DVD1 ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
NONE  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
LOCK OPTIONS  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu  
may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input may be substituted.  
When the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL or ANLG,  
CAUTION  
the SDP-5 recognizes some dts-encoded input sources as  
audio signals (not data signals) and outputs loud digital noise  
from the Zone 2 audio output connectors.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
ZONE2 IN Parameter Settings  
The table below describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.  
DIGITAL  
ANLG (Analog)  
DMIX (Downmix)  
The SDP-5 automatically sets the The SDP-5 automatically sets the Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX to send a downmixed version of  
ZONE2 IN parameter to DIGITAL ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 audio output connectors. Downmixes  
when the ANALOG IN parameter when the DIGITAL IN parameter can be generated for Dolby Digital and dts(-ES) sources.  
is set to NONE.  
is set to NONE.  
To generate a downmix, the same input must be selected in the  
Main Zone and Zone 2. Otherwise, the Zone 2 audio output  
connectors will mute.  
The SDP-5 sends the • The SDP-5 sends the  
assigned digital audio input  
connector to the Zone 2  
audio output connectors.  
The SDP-5 ignores the  
assigned analog audio input  
connector.  
assigned analog audio input  
connector to the Zone 2  
audio output connectors.  
The SDP-5 ignores the  
assigned digital audio input  
connector.  
Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 audio  
output connectors. For instance, when the MONO listening mode  
is activated in the Main Zone, the Zone 2 audio output connectors  
will generate mono output signals.  
Downmixes cannot be generated when the 5.1a BYPASS listening  
mode is activated in the Main Zone. However, when the ZONE2 IN  
parameter is set to DMIX, the signals from the Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Front L/R are sent to Zone 2. Signals  
from other Main Zone audio output connectors are ignored.  
Independent zone monitoring • Independent zone monitoring  
is available. is available.  
The DIGITAL IN parameter • The ANALOG IN parameter  
(3-7) can be used to assign a  
digital audio input connector  
for the selected input.  
(3-8) can be used to assign  
an analog audio input  
connector for the selected  
input.  
Independent zone monitoring is NOT available.  
It is recommended to set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX when  
recording from a DVD player without built-in Dolby Digital or  
®
®
dts-ES decoding to a VCR or PVR (i.e. Tivo or Replay TV ).  
The SDP-5 automatically uses LOGIC7 encoding to downmix  
multi-channel input sources (except 5.1-channel analog sources) to  
LOGIC7-encoded stereo output signals for listening and recording.  
LOGIC7-encoded downmixes are compatible with matrix decoders,  
but will sound best when played back through a LOGIC7 listening  
mode.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
SPEAKER SETUP  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
Selecting the SETUP menu SPEAKERS option opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu shown below, which can be used to configure the Main Zone  
audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup, set speaker distances, and calibrate output levels. The SDP-5 has eight Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R, and Rear L/R.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
FRONT L/R  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
N/A  
APART  
C
L
ASA  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
within a 30 to 120Hz range. With the exception of THX 80Hz, all  
crossover points activate a 24dB-per-octave filter. The graphs on  
the next page indicate the frequency response of these crossover  
points.  
CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens  
the CUSTOM SETUP menu shown above, which can be used to  
configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for a custom  
speaker setup. The CUSTOM SETUP menu allows the selection of  
independent crossover points for each Main Zone audio output  
connector. Refer to the the paragraph below for more information  
about determining crossover points.  
The THX 80Hz crossover point activates a 12dB-per-octave filter for  
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center,  
Side L/R, and Rear L/R, and a 24dB-per-octave filter for the Main  
Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer.  
For each Main Zone audio output connector, select the crossover  
point closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated speaker.  
For the output connector labeled Subwoofer, select the crossover  
point equal to the lowest crossover point of the other speakers.  
Determining Crossover Points  
The CUSTOM SETUP menu shown above can be used to assign  
independent crossover points for each Main Zone audio output  
connector. Crossover points can be selected in 10Hz increments  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
In general, low frequencies will be redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points.  
Low-frequency signals lower than the lowest crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL, low-  
frequency signals, excluding LFE information, will not be redirected to the subwoofer.  
Highpass Filter  
Lowpass Filter  
dB  
0
0
-12  
-24  
-36  
-48  
0
0
-60  
10  
20  
50  
100  
Hz  
200  
500  
1k  
Highpass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph  
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the  
curves represent crossover settings from 30 to 120Hz. The graph above does not  
show the THX 80Hz crossover point, which is 12dB per octave.  
Lowpass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph  
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the  
curves represent crossover settings from 30 to 120Hz.  
. . . Custom Speaker Setups continues on page 3-28  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Custom Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-27)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
FRONT L/R SPEAKERS  
FRONT L/R  
80Hz FULL  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
N/A  
APART  
C
L
ASA  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz  
FRONT L/R  
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz  
Parameter  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
FRONT L/R  
80Hz  
80Hz  
Opens the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be  
used to select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Front L/R. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a  
full-range audio output signal to these connectors. Otherwise, the  
SDP-5 activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose  
the setting closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated  
speakers.  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz,  
NONE  
SIDE L/R  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz,  
NONE  
REAR L/R  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz,  
NONE  
SUBWOOFER  
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz,  
NONE  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
BGC  
ASA  
N/A  
ON, OFF  
APART  
TOGETHER, CLOSE, APART  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CENTER SPEAKER  
FRONT L/R  
80Hz FULL  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
N/A  
APART  
C
L
ASA  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
CENTER  
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
Note:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CENTER  
When the CENTER parameter is set to NONE, center  
channel signals will not be redirected if the 5.1a  
BYPASS listening mode is activated. To redirect center  
channel signals, configure the speaker setup with the  
associated DVD-A/SACD player.  
Opens the CENTER SPEAKER menu shown above, which can be  
used to select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Center. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a full-  
range audio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the SDP-5  
activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose the  
setting closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated  
speaker. When set to NONE, the SDP-5 redirects center channel  
signals to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled  
Front L/R.  
. . . Custom Speaker Setups continues on page 3-30  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Custom Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-29)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SIDE L/R SPEAKERS  
FRONT L/R  
80Hz FULL  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
N/A  
APART  
C
L
ASA  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
SIDE L/R  
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
Note:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SIDE L/R  
When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby  
Digital Surround EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX ,  
and dts-ES decoding are not available.  
Opens the SIDE L/R SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be  
used to select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Side L/R. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a  
full-range audio output signal to these connectors. Otherwise, the  
SDP-5 activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose  
the setting closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated  
speakers.  
When set to NONE, the SDP-5 redirects side channel signals to the  
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Rear L/R. If the  
CUSTOM SETUP menu REAR L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the  
SDP-5 redirects surround channel signals to the Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Front L/R.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
REAR L/R SPEAKERS  
FRONT L/R  
80Hz FULL  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
N/A  
APART  
C
L
ASA  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
REAR L/R  
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
Note:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
REAR L/R  
When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE:  
Opens the REAR L/R SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be  
used to select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Rear L/R. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a  
full-range audio output signal to these connectors. Otherwise, the  
SDP-5 activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose  
the setting closest to the low-frequency rating of the associated  
speakers.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX, THX Ultra2, THX  
Surround EX, and dts-ES decoding are not  
available.  
The ASA parameter is not available.  
. . . Custom Speaker Setups continues on page 3-32  
When set to NONE, the SDP-5 redirects rear channel signals to the  
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Side L/R. If the  
CUSTOM SETUP menu SIDE L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the  
SDP-5 redirects surround channel signals to the Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Front L/R.  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Custom Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-31)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SUBWOOFER  
FRONT L/R  
80Hz FULL  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
N/A  
APART  
C
L
ASA  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
SUBWOOFER  
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SUBWOOFER  
Opens the SUBWOOFER menu shown above, which can be used to  
select a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector  
labeled Subwoofer. When set to FULL, the SDP-5 sends a full-range  
audio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the SDP-5  
activates a crossover point at the selected setting. Choose the  
setting equal to the lowest setting of the other speakers.  
Note:  
When the SUBWOOFER parameter is set to NONE,  
subwoofer signals will not be redirected if the 5.1a  
BYPASS listening mode is activated. To redirect  
subwoofer signals, configure the speaker setup with  
the associated DVD-A/SACD player.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
FRONT L/R  
80Hz ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
The BGC parameter is not  
available when the THX  
ULTRA2 SUB parameter is  
set to OFF.  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
R
SR  
RR  
The THX ULTRA2 SUB and BGC parameters are available  
on the CUSTOM and SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menus.When  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
N/A  
APART  
C
L
a parameter setting is adjusted on one menu, it is  
automatically adjusted on the other menu as well.  
ASA  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
ON, OFF  
BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
BGC  
or  
or  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the CUSTOM and  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to  
ON. When the BGC parameter is set to ON, a highpass 55Hz filter  
is applied to all Main Zone listening modes and audio output  
connectors. When set to OFF, no filter is applied to Main Zone  
listening modes and audio output connectors. When the  
parameter setting is N/A, the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to  
OFF and boundary gain compensation cannot be adjusted.  
Indicates whether or not the subwoofer connected to the Main  
Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer is Ultra2  
certified. Select the ON setting if the connected subwoofer is Ultra2  
certified and the OFF setting if the connected subwoofer is not  
Ultra2 certified. When set to ON, the CUSTOM and SYNTHESIS  
7CH SETUP menu BGC parameter (next column) can be used to  
adjust boundary gain compensation. When set to OFF, the BGC  
parameter is not available (N/A).  
Note:  
BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is  
caused by the proximity of the speakers to the  
listening room walls.  
. . . Custom Speaker Setups continues on page 3-34  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Custom Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-33)  
TOGETHER  
CLOSE  
APART  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
FRONT L/R  
80Hz ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
The ASA parameter is not  
available unless the 5.1  
THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX  
MUSIC, dts THX ULTRA2,  
or dts THX MUSIC listening  
mode is activated.  
R
SR  
RR  
The ASA parameter is available on the CUSTOM and  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menus. When the parameter  
setting is adjusted on one menu, it is automatically  
adjusted on the other menu as well.  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
N/A  
APART  
C
L
ASA  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array) TOGETHER, CLOSE, APART  
Note:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
ASA  
or  
ASA processing is only available when both side and  
rear speakers are present.  
A proprietary THX technology that processes signals sent to the  
rear speakers, optimizing the listening experience for THX Ultra2  
listening modes. To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing,  
it is recommended to configure a 7-channel speaker setup in which  
the rear speakers are placed close together facing the center of the  
listening space. The ASA parameter is not available unless the  
5.1 THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX MUSIC, dts THX ULTRA2, or dts THX  
MUSIC listening mode is activated.  
When the remote control 7/5 button is used to  
toggle between 7- and 5-channel playback:  
ASA processing is not available during 5-channel  
playback.  
The SDP-5 automatically switches between the  
5.1 THX ULTRA2 and 5.1 THX or dts THX  
ULTRA2 and dts THX listening modes.  
Select the TOGETHER setting if the distance between the rear  
speakers is less than 1 foot (0.3m). Select the CLOSE setting if the  
distance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot (0.3m),  
but less than 4 feet (1.2m). Select the APART setting if the distance  
between the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet (1.2m).  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
FRONT L/R*  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
!CAUTION!  
PRESSING THE V  
BUTTON WILL  
80Hz  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER*  
SIDE L/R*  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER*  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE  
THE OUTPUTS TO A  
SYNTHESIS  
R
SR  
80Hz  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
7CH SPEAKER  
CONFIGURATION  
N/A  
C
L
ASA  
APART  
When a THX speaker setup is selected, all CUSTOM  
SETUP menu parameters are automatically set to 80Hz.  
M
SUB  
*
These parameters cannot be  
adjusted.  
However,  
a custom speaker setup can still be  
configured with the CUSTOM SETUP menu.  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
Note:  
SYNTHESIS 7-CHANNEL SPEAKER SETUPS  
A JBL Synthesis 7-channel speaker setup includes  
THX-certified loudspeakers. Use the CUSTOM  
SETUP menu to configure a custom speaker setup  
for systems that do not include THX-certified  
loudspeakers.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
When the SPEAKER SETUP menu SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP option is  
selected, the SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP message shown above  
appears on the on-screen and front panel displays. When this  
message appears, press the remote control arrow to open the  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu and configure the Main Zone audio  
output connectors for a JBL Synthesis 7-channel speaker setup or  
press the arrow to close the message without configuring the  
Main Zone audio output connectors for a JBL Synthesis 7-channel  
speaker setup.  
A JBL Synthesis 7-channel speaker setup is not  
required to activate THX listening modes.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Setting(s)  
Parameter  
FRONT L/R*  
CENTER*  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
When the SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu opens, the Main Zone  
audio output connectors are configured for a JBL Synthesis  
7-channel speaker setup. The SDP-5 ignores all CUSTOM SETUP  
menu parameter settings and applies an 80Hz crossover point with  
24dB per-octave filter to all output connectors. This configuration  
is applied to all inputs and listening modes.  
SIDE L/R*  
80Hz  
REAR L/R  
80Hz, NONE  
80Hz  
SUBWOOFER*  
THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF  
ON, OFF  
BGC  
ASA  
N/A  
ON, OFF  
APART  
TOGETHER, CLOSE, APART  
*
These parameters cannot be adjusted.  
. . . Synthesis 7-Channel Speaker Setups continues on page 3-36  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
JBL Synthesis 7-Channel Speaker Setups (continued from page 3-35)  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
REAR SPEAKERS  
NONE  
FRONT L/R*  
80Hz 80Hz  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
!CAUTION!  
PRESSING THE V  
BUTTON WILL  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER*  
SIDE L/R*  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER*  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
N/A  
APART  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE  
THE OUTPUTS TO A  
SYNTHESIS  
R
SR  
80Hz  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
7CH SPEAKER  
CONFIGURATION  
C
L
ASA  
M
SUB  
*
These parameters cannot be  
adjusted.  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
REAR L/R  
THX 80Hz, NONE  
The SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB, BGC, and ASA  
parameters are identical to the CUSTOM SETUP menu THX  
ULTRA2 SUB, BGC, and ASA parameters. When one of these  
parameter settings is adjusted on one menu, it is automatically  
adjusted on the other menu at the same time. Refer to pages 3-33  
and 3-34 for these parameter descriptions.  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
REAR L/R  
Opens the REAR SPEAKERS menu shown above, which can be used  
to activate and deactivate the Main Zone audio output  
connectors labeled Rear L/R. When set to 80Hz, the SDP-5 activates  
these connectors and configures all Main Zone audio output  
connectors for a JBL Synthesis 7-Channel speaker setup. When set  
to NONE, the SDP-5 deactivates these connectors and configures  
the other Main Zone audio output connectors for a JBL Synthesis  
5-Channel speaker setup.  
Note:  
When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE:  
Dolby Digital Surround EX, THX Ultra2, THX  
Surround EX, and dts-ES decoding are not  
available.  
The ASA parameter is not available.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
0.0 to 30.0ft  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
FRONT LEFT 0.0ft ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
FEET  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
SUBWOOFER  
UNITS  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
C
L
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
MEASURING SPEAKER DISTANCES  
Note:  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
When the system includes a calibrated JBL Digital  
Equalizer, speaker distance parameters should  
remain at their factory-default settings (0.0ft). The  
digital equalizer will perform arrival time correction.  
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option  
opens the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu shown above, which can be  
used to set the distance between the listening position and the  
speakers connected to the Main Zone audio output connectors.  
The SDP-5 features a speaker distance control that allows distances  
to be entered for each speaker. This helps ensure accurate signal  
arrival time at the listening position, but is not a substitute for  
proper speaker placement.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
FEET  
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m  
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m  
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m  
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m  
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m  
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m  
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m  
0 to 30ft or 0 to 12m  
FEET, METERS  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
To determine the appropriate setting for each speaker, measure the  
distance between the listening position and the front baffle of the  
speaker. Then, set the corresponding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu  
parameter to the closest available setting.  
SUBWOOFER  
UNITS  
. . . Measuring Speaker Distances continues on page 3-38  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Measuring Speaker Distances (continued from page 3-37)  
FEET  
METERS  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
FRONT LEFT 0.0ft ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
FEET  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
SUBWOOFER  
UNITS  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
C
L
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
FRONT LEFT & RIGHT  
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m  
REAR LEFT & RIGHT  
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
FRONT LEFT OR FRONT RIGHT  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
REAR LEFT OR REAR RIGHT  
Set the speaker distance for the speakers connected to the Main  
Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R.  
Set the speaker distance for the speakers connected to the Main  
Zone audio output connectors labeled Rear L/R.  
CENTER  
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m  
SUBWOOFER  
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
CENTER  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
SUBWOOFER  
Sets the speaker distance for the speaker connected to the Main  
Zone audio output connector labeled Center.  
Sets the speaker distance for the subwoofer connected to the Main  
Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer.  
SIDE LEFT & RIGHT  
0.0 to 30.0ft or 0.0 to 12.0m  
UNITS  
FEET, METERS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
SIDE LEFT OR SIDE RIGHT  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
UNITS  
Set the speaker distance for the speakers connected to the Main  
Zone audio output connectors labeled Side L/R.  
Defines the unit of measurement in which the SDP-5 measures  
speaker distances. When set to FEET, the SDP-5 measures speaker  
distances in feet. When set to METERS, the SDP-5 measures speaker  
distances in meters. When the UNITS parameter setting is toggled,  
the SDP-5 converts the current speaker distance to the closest  
available value in the selected unit of measurement.  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
INTERNAL NOISE  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST  
FRONT LEFT  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
+0.0dB  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
DACS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
CENTER  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
C
L
SUBWOOFER  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
Before output level calibration begins, remove objects  
(as well as people) that obstruct the line-of-sight path between  
the SPL meter and the speaker being measured.  
CALIBRATING OUTPUT LEVELS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option  
opens the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown above, which can be  
used to calibrate output levels for the Main Zone audio output  
connectors. Calibration ensures that output levels correspond to  
THX reference levels (75dB) for input sources such as DVDs.  
Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening  
position, placing the SPL meter at the approximate spot where  
the listener’s head will be during listening.  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
Please note the following to ensure accurate output level  
calibration:  
Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown above, which  
indicates that the internal noise test produces loud calibration  
test signals. When this message appears, press the Menu arrow  
to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown above and con-  
duct the internal noise test or press the Menu arrow to close the  
message without conducting the internal noise test. When the  
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu opens, the internal noise test  
automatically begins.  
It is recommended to use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter  
to calibrate output levels. An SPL meter is a device that  
measures the relative loudness of the speakers to ensure  
accurate output level calibration. SPL meters are available at  
Radio Shack (catalog number 33-2050).  
Before output level calibration begins, eliminate extraneous  
noises in the listening space, such as conversations, air  
conditioners, and sounds that filter in through open doors and  
windows.  
. . . Internal Noise Test continues on page 3-40  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
Internal Noise Test (continued from page 3-39)  
Note:  
Main Zone audio output connectors for which the  
corresponding CUSTOM or SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
menu parameter is set to NONE cannot be adjusted  
during the internal noise test. These output  
connectors can be adjusted during the external noise  
test, but there is no need to do so.  
Note:  
The SDP-5 automatically sets volume level to +0dB  
when the internal noise test begins. It is recommended  
to avoid adjusting master volume level while the test  
is in progress to achieve a 75dB THX reference level  
(a 75dB SPL meter reading).  
When the internal noise test is conducted, a calibration test signal  
travels to the Main Zone audio output connectors in the order  
listed on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu. As the calibration test  
signal travels, the cursor automatically scrolls downward through  
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu parameters, highlighting each  
speaker parameter as the corresponding output connector is tested.  
Each output connector is tested for about 4 seconds.  
The SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu can be used to manually adjust  
output levels while the internal noise test is conducted. Refer to  
page 3-42 for more information.  
Please note the following:  
When the internal noise test is conducted, it is possible to  
select a SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu parameter just as the  
SDP-5 is about to automatically scroll to the next parameter,  
causing the SDP-5 to send the calibration noise to both  
speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired speaker.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST FRONT LEFT  
DACS CALIBRATION  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
SPEAKERS  
DACS CALIBRATION  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
CENTER  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
C
L
SUBWOOFER  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
When DACS calibration is conducted, the SDP-5 activates a  
listening mode based on the Main Zone input source that is  
present. The table in the next column indicates the listening mode  
that is activated for each input source. When a listening mode is  
activated during DACS calibration, it retains its factory-default  
settings, ignoring custom settings that might have been selected  
on the corresponding listening mode menu. Custom settings will  
be restored after DACS calibration is complete.  
DACS CALIBRATION  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
DACS CALIBRATION  
Opens the DACS CALIBRATION menu shown above, which can be  
used to adjust output levels while DACS calibration is conducted.  
DACS calibration requires an external calibration source, such as an  
audio calibration disc or, in JBL Synthesis systems, the DACS (JBL  
Digital Acoustical Calibration System). An audio calibration disc can  
be used with the DACS.  
®
2-Channel  
Sources  
Dolby Digital  
Sources  
dts(-ES)  
Sources  
To optimize systems that include DACS and a JBL Digital  
Equalizer:  
DOLBY PLII MOVIE  
DOLBY DIGITAL*  
dts(-ES)*  
1. Connect the DACS Signal Generator left and right output  
connectors labeled EVP-1 to the SDP-5 analog audio input  
connectors labeled 1. These connectors are active in the TAPE  
input.  
*
These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker  
configuration, and certain parameter settings.  
2. Set the master volume level to 0dB.  
This will provide the correct signal path and reference output level.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
3. When the desired parameter is highlighted, press the arrow  
to select this parameter. A horizontal bar graph will open on  
the on-screen and front panel displays.  
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST & DACS CALIBRATION Menus  
Conducting the internal noise test opens the SPEAKER LEVEL  
ADJUST menu shown on page 3-39. Conducting DACS calibration  
opens the DACS CALIBRATION menu shown on the previous page.  
Both menus can be used to adjust output levels for the Main Zone  
audio output connectors.  
4. When the horizontal bar graph opens, follow the instructions  
on page 2-11 to adjust the selected parameter. When the SPL  
meter is set to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response, output  
levels should be adjusted to achieve a 75dB SPL meter reading  
from the primary listening position. When the SPL meter is not  
set to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response, output levels  
should be adjusted to achieve the appropriate SPL meter  
reading from the primary listening position.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
5. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the ꢁ  
arrow to close the horizontal bar graph and return to the  
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST or DACS CALIBRATION menu. When  
the internal noise test is conducted, the internal noise test will  
continue, and automatic scrolling will resume.  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
FRONT LEFT & RIGHT  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
SUBWOOFER  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
(TEST) FRONT LEFT OR FRONT RIGHT  
Set the output levels for the speakers connected to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R.  
To manually adjust output levels while the internal noise test or  
DACS calibration is conducted:  
1. When the internal noise test is conducted, set the SPL meter to  
“C” weighting and “SLOW” response. When DACS calibration  
is conducted, set the SPL meter according to the DACS  
Installers Manual or audio calibration disc instructions. If no  
setting is specified, set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and  
“SLOW” response.  
CENTER  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
(TEST)  
CENTER  
Sets the output level for the speaker connected to the Main Zone  
audio output connector labeled Center.  
2. Press the remote control and arrows to highlight the  
desired SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST or DACS CALIBRATION menu  
parameter.  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
SIDE LEFT & RIGHT  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
(TEST)  
SIDE LEFT OR SIDE RIGHT  
Set the output levels for the speakers connected to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors labeled Side L/R.  
REAR LEFT & RIGHT  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
(TEST)  
REAR LEFT OR REAR RIGHT  
Set the output levels for the speakers connected to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors labeled Rear L/R.  
SUBWOOFER  
-18.0 to +12.0dB  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
(TEST)  
SUBWOOFER  
Sets the output level for the subwoofer connected to the Main  
Zone audio output connector labeled Subwoofer.  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST CAL NOISE  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
ON ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
DACS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
SUB LIMITER  
OFF  
100dB  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SUB LIMIT ADJ  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
C
L
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
CAL NOISE  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
CAL NOISE  
Opens the BASS PEAK LIMITER menu shown above, which can  
be used to set amplitude limits for all speakers to which low  
frequencies are redirected, including the subwoofer.  
Determines whether the bass peak limiter is set with an internal or  
external source. When set to ON, the SDP-5 activates an  
internal calibration noise signal to set the limiter. When set to OFF,  
the SDP-5 deactivates the internal calibration noise test signal. An  
external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc is  
required to generate a noise signal to set the bass peak limiter.  
The SDP-5 is equipped with an internal limiter that prevents low-  
frequency output signals from exceeding a designated level. This is  
essential for Dolby Digital and dts(-ES) input sources that produce  
low-frequency peaks at much higher levels than 2-channel sources.  
In home theaters, the subwoofer and its associated amplifier might  
not be able to reproduce these levels without overloading.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
CAL NOISE  
ON  
ON, OFF  
SUB LIMITER  
SUB LIMIT ADJ  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
100dB  
75 to 120dB  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST CAL NOISE  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
ON ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SUB LIMITER  
OFF  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
DACS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SUB LIMIT ADJ  
100dB  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
C
L
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
SUB LIMITER  
ON, OFF  
SUB LIMIT ADJ  
75 to 120dB  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
SUB LIMITER  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
SUB LIMIT ADJ  
Limits output signals for the Main Zone audio output connector  
labeled Subwoofer, as well as other Main Zone audio output  
connectors to which low-frequency signals are redirected. When set  
to ON, the SDP-5 restricts output signals to the level specified in  
the BASS PEAK LIMITER menu SUB LIMIT ADJ parameter. When set  
to OFF, the SDP-5 does not restrict output levels, regardless of the  
SUB LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.  
Specifies the output level restriction placed on the Main Zone  
audio output connector labeled Subwoofer, as well as other Main  
Zone audio output connectors to which low-frequency signals are  
redirected. This restriction is applied when the BASS PEAK LIMITER  
menu SUB LIMITER parameter is set to ON. When the SUB LIMIT  
ADJ parameter is selected, it is automatically set to 75dB.  
75 to 120dB  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST CAL NOISE  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
ON ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
DACS CALIBRATION  
SUB LIMITER  
OFF  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
SUB LIMIT ADJ  
100dB  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
C
L
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
Selecting the SETUP menu REAR PANEL CONFIG option opens the REAR PANEL CONFIG menu shown below, which can be used to configure  
the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo connectors, one 5.1-channel and five stereo connectors, or two stereo and two 5.1-channel  
connectors.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
OR  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG  
OR  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG  
LOCK OPTIONS  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG  
Configures the analog audio input connectors as eight stereo  
connectors, which is the factory-default configuration.  
Configures the analog audio input connectors as one 5.1-channel  
and five stereo connectors.  
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as  
eight stereo connectors:  
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as one  
5.1-channel and five stereo connectors:  
All connectors are configured as stereo connectors.  
The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are configured as  
stereo connectors.  
Neither of the 5.1-channel connectors is available. Sources that  
were assigned to the 5.1-channel connector labeled 3, 4, and  
5 are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3, 4, and 5.  
Sources that were assigned to the 5.1-channel connector  
labeled 6, 7, and 8 are reassigned to the stereo connectors  
labeled 6, 7, and 8.  
The connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8 are configured as a  
5.1-channel connector. This connector is sent to the Main  
Zone audio output connectors as indicated in the table at the  
bottom of the next column.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
6, 7, and 8. The 5.1-channel connectors should only be used  
with 5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.  
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG (continued from page 3-45)  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG  
The 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors are sent to the  
Main Zone analog audio output connectors as shown in the  
table below.  
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as one  
5.1-channel and five stereo connectors:  
Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo  
connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8 are reassigned to the  
5.1-channel connector labeled 6, 7, and 8. The 5.1-channel  
connectors should only be used with 5.1-channel analog  
sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.  
Input Connector  
Output Connector  
Front L  
(L)  
(R)  
Front R  
(C)  
Center  
(SUB)  
(LS)  
(RS)  
Subwoofer  
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG  
Side L and Rear L  
Side R and Rear R  
SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG  
Configures the analog audio input connectors as two stereo and  
two 5.1-channel connectors.  
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as two  
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors:  
The connectors labeled 1 and 2 are configured as stereo  
connectors.  
The connectors labeled 3, 4, and 5 are configured as a 5.1-  
channel connector, and the connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8 are  
configured as a 5.1-channel connector. These connectors are  
sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in  
the table at the bottom of this column.  
Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo  
connectors labeled 3, 4, and 5 are reassigned to the  
5.1-channel connector labeled 3, 4, and 5. Two-channel  
sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors labeled 6,  
7, and 8 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector labeled  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
DISPLAY SETUP  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu shown below, which can be used to customize the on-screen and  
front panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
OFF  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
LOCK OPTIONS  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
Parameter  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
Refer to page 3-49  
Refer to page 3-52  
Restores audio/video synchronization when using products such as  
video processors that introduce a video signal delay. This  
parameter can be used to set an audio signal delay to compensate  
for the video signal delay.  
OFF  
OFF  
N/A  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
ON, OFF  
N/A  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
OFF  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
LOCK OPTIONS  
To customize the name of the SDP-5:  
CUSTOM NAME  
ON, OFF  
1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path to open the EDIT  
CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown below.  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
CUSTOM NAME  
Activates the display of a custom unit name, which appears when  
the SDP-5 is activated. When set to ON, the custom name scrolls  
across the on-screen and front panel displays when the SDP-5 is  
activated. When set to OFF, the custom name does not appear  
when the SDP-5 is activated. The custom name can be entered in  
the DISPLAY SETUP menu EDIT CUSTOM NAME parameter.  
2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu opens,  
press the remote control Menu and arrows to change the  
character above the cursor (^).  
3. When the desired character has been selected, press the Menu  
arrow to advance to the next character space. Press the  
Menu arrow to return to the previous character space. The  
cursor will automatically wrap to the first character space when  
the last character space is passed.  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired custom unit name.  
Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu shown below, which can be  
used to create a custom unit name. When the CUSTOM parameter  
is set to ON, the custom unit name appears on the on-screen and  
front panel displays when the SDP-5 is activated.  
5. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press  
the Menu arrow to close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-  
down menu and return to the DISPLAY SETUP menu.  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
SDP-5  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
^
SPEAKERS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT  
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS  
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
OFF  
LOCK OPTIONS  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
ALWAYS ON  
2 SECONDS  
ALWAYS OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
POSITION  
FORMAT  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
TOP  
NTSC  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
OFF  
OFF  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
ON  
LOCK OPTIONS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP  
STATUS  
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
STATUS  
Selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu ON-SCREEN DISPLAY option  
opens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu shown above, which can be  
used to customize the on-screen display.  
Activates and deactivates the on-screen display sent to the Main  
Zone video output connector. When set to ALWAYS ON, the  
on-screen display remains on at all times. When set to 2 SECONDS,  
the on-screen display appears for 2 seconds whenever the input  
source changes or the SDP-5 receives a command. When set to  
ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen display remains off at all times. It will  
not reappear until the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS  
parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
STATUS  
2 SECONDS  
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,  
ALWAYS OFF  
POSITION  
TOP  
NTSC  
ON  
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM  
SECAM, PAL, NTSC  
ON, OFF  
Note:  
FORMAT  
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS  
parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen  
display immediately disappears. Press the remote  
control OSD button or use the front panel display as  
a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2  
SECONDS.  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
ON  
ON, OFF  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
TOP  
CENTER  
BOTTOM  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
POSITION  
FORMAT  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
TOP  
NTSC  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
OFF  
OFF  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
ON  
LOCK OPTIONS  
POSITION  
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM  
FORMAT  
SECAM, PAL, NTSC  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
POSITION  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FORMAT  
Controls the vertical position of the two-line status on the display  
device screen. When set to TOP, the two-line status appears near  
the top of the display device screen. When set to CENTER, the two-  
line status is centered on the display device screen. When set to  
BOTTOM, the two-line status appears near the bottom of the  
display device screen. Refer to page 2-18 for more information  
about the two-line status.  
Controls the compatibility between the video input connectors, the  
video switcher, and the display device. Select the setting that is  
compatible with the source components and display device.  
Note:  
The FORMAT parameter affects the composite and  
S-video output connectors. It does not affect the  
component video output connector.  
SECAM  
PAL  
NTSC  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
POSITION  
FORMAT  
BACKGROUND  
TOP  
NTSC  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
OFF  
OFF  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
REMOTE STATE  
ON  
LOCK OPTIONS  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
POSITION  
FORMAT  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
TOP  
NTSC  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
OFF  
OFF  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
ON  
LOCK OPTIONS  
BACKGROUND  
ON, OFF  
REMOTE STATE  
ON, OFF  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
BACKGROUND  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
REMOTE STATE  
Activates and deactivates the menu background. When set to ON,  
on-screen display menus appear over a solid blue or gray  
background (depending on the display device). When set to OFF,  
on-screen display menus appear over the video input signal.  
Controls the remote control command bank indicator that appears  
on the on-screen display. When set to ON, a command bank  
indicator appears in the top-right corner of the on-screen display to  
indicate the last command bank from which the SDP-5 received a  
command. When set to OFF, no command bank indicator appears  
on the on-screen display.  
Note:  
When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the  
on-screen display will disappear if the display device  
is using the component video output connector.  
A "Z" appears when a command from the Zone 2 command bank  
was received last. An "S" appears when a command from the Shift  
command bank was received last. No letter appears when a com-  
mand from the Main Zone command bank was received last.  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS 2 SECONDS ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
POSITION  
FORMAT  
BACKGROUND  
TOP  
NTSC  
ON  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
OFF  
OFF  
REMOTE STATE  
ON  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
LOCK OPTIONS  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
ALWAYS ON  
2 SECONDS  
ALWAYS OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS ALWAYS ON ꢀ  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
BRIGHTNESS  
75%  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
OFF  
DISPLAYS  
CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
LOCK OPTIONS  
whenever the input source changes or the SDP-5 receives a  
command. When set to ALWAYS OFF, the front panel display  
remains off at all times.  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SETUP  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu shown above, which can  
be used to customize the front panel display.  
Note:  
When the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS  
parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF, the front panel  
display immediately disappears. Press the remote  
control FP button or use the on-screen display as a  
guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2  
SECONDS.  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
STATUS  
ALWAYS ON  
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,  
ALWAYS OFF  
BRIGHTNESS  
75%  
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%  
BRIGHTNESS  
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%  
STATUS  
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
BRIGHTNESS  
SETUP  
DISPLAYS  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
STATUS  
Controls the brightness of front panel display characters. When a  
setting is selected, front panel display illumination automatically  
adjusts to the selected brightness.  
Activates and deactivates the front panel display. When set to  
ALWAYS ON, the front panel display remains on at all times. When  
set to 2 SECONDS, the front panel display appears for 2 seconds  
100%  
75%  
50%  
25%  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS ALWAYS ON ꢀ  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
FRONT DISPLAY  
AI
BRIGHTNESS  
SPEAKERS  
75%  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
OFF  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
LOCK OPTIONS  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
Selecting the SETUP menu VOLUME CONTROLS option opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu shown below, which can be used to  
configure Main Zone and Zone 2 volume levels.  
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB  
-10dB  
-20dB  
-30dB  
-40dB  
FULL MUTE  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP  
MAIN PWR ON  
-30dB ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
-30dB  
MAIN PWR ON  
MUTE LEVEL FULL MUTE  
SPEAKERS  
MUTE LEVEL FULL MUTE  
B  
-30dB  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
ZONE PWR ON  
-30dB  
ZONE PWR ON  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
MUTE LEVEL  
FULL MUTE, -40dB, -30dB, -20dB, -10dB  
Parameter  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
MUTE LEVEL  
MAIN PWR ON  
MUTE LEVEL  
-30dB  
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB  
Sets the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone  
whenever the front panel or remote control Mute button is  
pressed. When set to FULL MUTE, Main Zone volume level will be  
fully attenuated whenever the front panel or remote control Mute  
button is pressed. Otherwise, Main Zone volume level will be  
attenuated to the selected level.  
FULL MUTE FULL MUTE, -40dB, -30dB, -20dB,  
-10dB  
ZONE PWR ON  
-30dB  
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB  
MAIN PWR ON  
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
MAIN PWR ON  
ZONE PWR ON  
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB  
Sets the Main Zone volume level that will be selected whenever the  
Main Zone is activated. When set to LAST LVL, the Main Zone will  
activate at the last volume level that was selected in that zone  
during the previous operating session.  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
ZONE PWR ON  
Sets the Zone 2 volume level that will be selected whenever  
Zone 2 is activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 2 will activate at  
the last volume level that was selected in that zone during the  
previous operating session.  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
TRIGGER SETUP  
REMOTE ONLY  
TRIGGER SETUP  
OFF ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD1  
OFF  
OFF  
SETUP  
TRIGGER  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
ZONE2 INPUTS  
L7 FILM  
* TRIGGER SETUP menu  
listening mode names  
are fixed, meaning  
these names do not  
change when certain  
encoding is present.  
For instance, the 5.1  
THX SurEX listening  
mode label appears  
whether THX Ultra2,  
THX Surround EX,  
or no encoding is  
engaged.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
Selecting the SETUP menu TRIGGER option opens the  
TRIGGER SETUP menu shown at the right, which can  
be used to configure the trigger output connector  
labeled 1. The SDP-5 rear panel houses two 12V DC  
trigger output connectors. The connector labeled  
PWR – the power trigger output connector – is not configurable. It is activated when the  
SDP-5 is activated, and deactivated when the SDP-5 is deactivated. The trigger output  
connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote or program operation.  
L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
%!PLII + THX  
%!PLII MOVIE  
%!PLII MUSIC  
%!PRO LOGIC  
dts neo:6 FILM  
dts neo:6 MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
PARTY  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
REMOTE ONLY  
Program Operation  
All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters – except the REMOTE ONLY  
parameter – are considered program operation parameters.  
OFF  
N/A  
ON, OFF  
ON, OFF  
REMOTE ONLY  
ON, OFF  
5.1 L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 TV  
SETUP  
TRIGGER  
REMOTE ONLY  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 THXI SurEX  
5.1 THXI MUSIC  
%! DIGITAL EX  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
DTS-ES L7 FILM  
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
DTS-ES THX  
DTS THXI MUSIC  
DTS-ES  
Configures the trigger output connector labeled 1 for remote operation. When set to ON, this  
connector is configured for remote operation. When the Zone 2 command bank is activated, it  
can be activated and deactivated with the remote control Mode and buttons (2-14). The  
SDP-5 ignores all other TRIGGER SETUP menu parameter settings. When set to OFF, the trigger  
output connector labeled 1 is not configured for remote operation. It can be configured for  
program operation. Refer to the next page for more information about configuring the trigger  
output connector labeled 1 for program operation.  
DTS-ES 2-CHAN  
5.1a BYPASS  
2CH BYPASS  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
TRIGGER SETUP  
REMOTE ONLY  
Program Operation Parameters  
ON, OFF  
OFF ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
DVD1  
OFF  
OFF  
SETUP  
TRIGGER  
(PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETER)  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
ZONE2 INPUTS  
L7 FILM  
L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
%!PLII + THX  
%!PLII MOVIE  
%!PLII MUSIC  
* TRIGGER SETUP menu  
listening mode names  
are fixed, meaning  
these names do not  
change when certain  
encoding is present.  
For instance, the 5.1  
THX SurEX listening  
mode label appears  
whether THX Ultra2,  
THX Surround EX,  
or no encoding is  
engaged.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON
ON
ON
OOFNF  
Configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 for  
program operation. All TRIGGER SETUP menu  
parameters – except the REMOTE ONLY parameter –  
are considered program operation parameters. The  
connector can be associated with multiple inputs and  
listening modes at the same time.  
ON  
When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF and program operation parameters are set to  
ON, the trigger output connector labeled 1 is associated with the corresponding Main Zone  
input, Main Zone listening modes, or Zone 2 inputs. (The connector cannot be associated with  
individual Zone 2 inputs; rather, it can be associated with the Zone 2 inputs as a group.) When  
configured for program operation, the connector is activated when the corresponding inputs  
and listening modes are selected and deactivated when the corresponding inputs and listening  
modes are deselected.  
ON
ON
ON
OOFNF  
%!PRO LOGIC  
R
ddtssnneeoo:66 FFIILMM  
R
dts neo:6 MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
ON  
ON
ON
ON
OFF  
ON  
PANORAMA  
ON  
PARTY  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
ON
OFF  
ON
OOFNF  
Note:  
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the factory-  
default version of the selected listening mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP  
menu listening mode parameter is automatically set to OFF.  
ON  
5.1 L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 TV  
ON
ON
ON
OOFNF  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 THXI SurEX  
5.1 THXI MUSIC  
%!DIGITAL EX  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
ON  
ON
OFF  
ON
OOFNF  
ON  
DTS-ES L7 FILM  
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
ON
ON
DTS-ES THX MUSIC ON
DTS THXMUSIC  
DTS-ES  
OOFNF  
ON  
DTS-ES 2-CHAN  
5.1a BYPASS  
2CH BYPASS  
OFF  
ON
OFF  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
SDP-5  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
Selecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu shown below, which can be used to lock and unlock  
settings in the MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS, and SETUP menu branches.  
LOCKED  
UNLOCKED  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MODES UNLOCKED ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
SPEAKERS  
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
SETUP  
UNLOCKED  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
AUDIO CNTRL  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
Parameter  
MODES  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
AUDIO CNTRL  
UNLOCKED  
UNLOCKED  
UNLOCKED  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
Controls AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings. When set to  
LOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set to  
UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.  
AUDIO CNTRL  
SETUP  
MODES  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
SETUP  
LOCKED, UNLOCKED  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MODES  
SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
SETUP  
Controls MODE ADJUST menu branch settings, which include all  
listening mode menu settings. When set to LOCKED, these settings  
cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings can be  
adjusted.  
Controls SETUP menu branch settings. When set to LOCKED, these  
settings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these  
settings can be adjusted.  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP  
JBL Synthesis  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
AUDIO CONTROLS  
AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
JBL Synthesis  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
Selecting the MAIN MENU AUDIO CONTROLS option opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu shown below, which can be used to customize the  
Main Zone audio output connectors and control the balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors. The BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, LOUDNESS,  
BALANCE, and FADER parameters affect the Main Zone audio output connectors. These parameter settings affect all inputs and listening modes  
selected in the Main Zone, except the 5.1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS listening modes. The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter controls the balance  
of the Zone 2 audio output connectors. This parameter setting affects all inputs selected in Zone 2.  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
MAIN MENU  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
BASS  
+0.0dB ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
TREBLE  
TILT EQ  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
ON  
<|>  
<|>  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
<|>  
Default  
Value  
Possible  
Settings  
BASS  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
Parameter  
BASS  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
BASS  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
ON  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
Controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the  
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and  
Subwoofer. The graph shown on the left of the next page illustrates  
the frequency response of BASS parameter settings.  
TREBLE  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
-3.0 to +3.0dB  
ON, OFF  
TILT EQ  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
<|>  
L< to <|> to >R  
B< to <|> to >F  
L< to <|> to >R  
<|>  
TREBLE  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
<|>  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
TREBLE  
AUDIO CONTROLS menu parameter descriptions begin in the next column.  
Controls the amount of boost or cut applied to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center. The graph  
shown on the right of the next page illustrates the frequency  
response of TREBLE parameter settings.  
Note:  
When the Zone 2 command bank is activated,  
pressing the remote control Blue button sets the  
BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ parameters to +0.0dB.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SDP-5  
BASS Parameter Settings  
TREBLE Parameter Settings  
+6.0  
+5.5  
+5.0  
+4.5  
+4.0  
+3.5  
+3.0  
+2.5  
+2.0  
+1.5  
+1.0  
+0.5  
+0.0  
-0.5  
-1.0  
-1.5  
-2.0  
-2.5  
-3.0  
-3.5  
-4.0  
-4.5  
-5.0  
-5.5  
-6.0  
+6.0  
+5.5  
+5.0  
+4.5  
+4.0  
+3.5  
+3.0  
+2.5  
+2.0  
+1.5  
+1.0  
+0.5  
+0.0  
-0.5  
-1.0  
-1.5  
-2.0  
-2.5  
-3.0  
-3.5  
-4.0  
-4.5  
-5.0  
-5.5  
-6.0  
+0.0  
+0.0  
10  
20  
50  
100  
200  
500  
Hz  
1k  
2k  
5k  
10k 20k  
10  
20  
50  
100  
200  
500  
Hz  
1k  
2k  
5k  
10k 20k  
The BASS parameter (previous page) controls the amount of low-frequency boost or  
cut applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and  
Subwoofer.  
The TREBLE parameter (previous page) controls the amount of boost or cut applied to  
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.  
. . . AUDIO CONTROLS continues on page 4-4  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
JBL Synthesis  
AUDIO CONTROLS (continued from page 4-3)  
-3.0 to +3.0dB  
ON  
OFF  
MAIN MENU  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
MAIN MENU  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
BASS  
+0.0dB ꢀ  
BASS  
+0.0dB ꢀ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
TREBLE  
TILT EQ  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
ON  
TREBLE  
TILT EQ  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
OOFNF  
<|>  
<|>  
<|>  
<|>  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
<|>  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
<|>  
TILT EQ  
-3.0 to +3.0dB  
LOUDNESS  
ON, OFF  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
TILT EQ  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
LOUDNESS  
Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone  
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and Subwoofer.  
This parameter setting affects the entire frequency spectrum with a  
hinge point at 1kHz. As the setting is increased, frequencies higher  
than 1kHz are boosted, while frequencies lower than 1kHz are  
simultaneously cut. As the setting is decreased, frequencies higher than  
1kHz are cut, while frequencies lower than 1kHz are simultaneously  
boosted. The graph shown on the left of the next page illustrates  
the frequency response of TILT EQ parameter settings.  
Controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is automatically  
applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front  
L/R, Center, and Subwoofer. When set to ON, loudness  
compensation is automatically applied based on volume level. As  
volume level increases, the amount of boost automatically  
decreases. The loudness contour is optimized for sources calibrated  
to THX reference levels. When set to OFF, no loudness  
compensation is applied. The graph shown on the right of the next  
page illustrates the frequency response that is automatically  
applied when the LOUDNESS parameter is set to ON and Main  
Zone volume level is adjusted.  
Note:  
When the Zone 2 command bank is activated,  
pressing the remote control Blue button sets the  
BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ parameters to +0.0dB.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SDP-5  
TILT EQ Parameter Settings  
LOUDNESS Parameter Settings  
+3.0  
+2.8  
+2.6  
+2.4  
+2.2  
+2.0  
+1.8  
+1.6  
+1.4  
+1.2  
+1.0  
+0.8  
+0.6  
+0.4  
+0.2  
-0.0  
-0.2  
-0.4  
-0.6  
-0.8  
-1.0  
-1.2  
-1.4  
-1.6  
-1.8  
-2.0  
-2.2  
-2.4  
-2.6  
-2.8  
-3.0  
+3.0  
+2.8  
+2.6  
+2.4  
+2.2  
+2.0  
+1.8  
+1.6  
+1.4  
+1.2  
+1.0  
+0.8  
+0.6  
+0.4  
+0.2  
+0.0  
-0.2  
-0.4  
-0.6  
-0.8  
-1.0  
-1.2  
-1.4  
-1.6  
-1.8  
-2.0  
-2.2  
-2.4  
-2.6  
-2.8  
-3.0  
dB  
0
0
+12  
0
0
+9  
0
0
+6  
0
0
+3  
0
0
10  
20  
50  
100  
200  
500  
Hz  
1k  
2k  
5k  
10k  
20k  
10  
20  
50  
100  
200  
500  
Hz  
1k  
2k  
5k  
10k 20k  
The TILT EQ parameter (previous page) controls the amount of tilt equalization  
applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and  
Subwoofer.  
The LOUDNESS parameter (previous page) controls the amount of low-frequency  
boost that is automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled  
Front L/R, Center, and Subwoofer.  
. . . AUDIO CONTROLS continues on page 4-6  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
JBL Synthesis  
AUDIO CONTROLS (continued from page 4-5)  
L<  
<|>  
>R  
B<  
<|>  
>F  
MAIN MENU  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
MAIN MENU  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
BASS  
BASS  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
ON  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
ON  
TREBLE  
TILT EQ  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
TREBLE  
TILT EQ  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER
<|>  
<|>  
<|>  
<|>  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
<|>  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
<|>  
BALANCE  
L< to <|> to >R  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
L< to <|> to >R  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
BALANCE  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Main Zone audio output  
connectors.  
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 2 audio output  
connectors.  
FADER  
B< to <|> to >F  
Note:  
When the Zone 2 command bank is activated,  
pressing the remote control FP button centers the  
ZONE2 BALANCE parameter.  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
FADER  
Controls the back-to-front balance of the Main Zone audio output  
connectors.  
Note:  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing  
the remote control FP button centers the Main Zone  
BALANCE and FADER parameters.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
MODE ADJUST  
MODE ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Listening Mode Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters • Mode and Buttons • Mode  
Family Selection Buttons  
Listening Mode Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
L7 FILM • L7 TV • L7 MUSIC • L7 MUSIC SURR • DOLBY PLII + THX • DOLBY PLII  
MOVIE • DOLBY PLII MUSIC • DOLBY PRO LOGIC • dts NEO:6 FILM • dts NEO:6  
MUSIC • NIGHTCLUB • CONCERT HALL • CHURCH • CATHEDRAL • PANORAMA •  
PANORAMA CALIBRATION • PARTY • 2-CHANNEL • MONO LOGIC • MONO  
SURROUND • MONO • 5.1 L7 FILM • 5.1 L7 TV • 5.1 L7 MUSIC • 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX  
ULTRA2, & 5.1 THX SurEX • 5.1 THX MUSIC • DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
• 5.1 2-CHANNEL • 5.1 MONO LOGIC • 5.1 MONO SURR • 5.1 MONO • dts-ES  
DECODING • dts(-ES) L7 FILM • dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC • dts THX ULTRA2 & dts-ES THX  
• dts THX Music • dts(-ES) • dts(-ES) 2-CHAN • 5.1a BYPASS • 2CH BYPASS  
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
MAIN MENU  
MODE ADJUST  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
Selecting the MAIN MENU MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu shown at  
the left, which can be used to select a listening mode for adjustment. When the MODE  
ADJUST menu opens, the currently activated Main Zone listening mode is highlighted.  
L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
%!PLII + THX  
%!PLII MOVIE  
%!PLII MUSIC  
%!PRO LOGIC  
dts neo:6 FILM  
dts neo:6 MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
Selecting a listening mode does not activate that listening mode for the current Main  
Zone input source. Rather, selecting a listening mode opens the corresponding listening  
mode menu, which can be used to customize the activated listening mode. These adjustments  
are applied when that listening mode is selected with one of the methods described in the  
Listening Mode Activation section that begins below.  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
PARTY  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
5.1 L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 TV  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 THXI*  
5.1 THXI MUSIC  
%!DIGITAL*  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION  
Listening modes are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), and analog input sources.  
The SDP-5 allows listening mode selection for all Main Zone sources. In some cases, the  
SDP-5 automatically activates a listening mode in response to certain commands. For this  
reason, it is important to understand the three methods through which listening mode  
activation occurs.  
Listening modes can be activated with:  
DTS-ES L7 FILM*  
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC*  
DTS-ES THX *  
DTS THXI MUSIC  
DTS-ES*  
DTS-ES 2-CHAN*  
5.1a BYPASS  
2CH BYPASS  
the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters (3-13)  
the front panel or remote control Mode and buttons (2-3, 2-14)  
the remote control mode family selection buttons (2-16)  
* These listening mode names differ depending on  
the input source, the speaker configuration, and  
certain parameter settings. Refer to the Listening  
Mode Descriptions section that begins on the next  
page for more information.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION  
PARAMETERS  
Button  
Button  
2-Channel  
Sources  
Dolby Digital  
Sources  
dts(-ES)  
Sources  
The INPUT SETUP menus include three preferred listening mode  
selection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, and dts-ES. These  
parameters can be used to select a preferred listening mode for  
2-channel, Dolby Digital, and dts(-ES) input sources. The SDP-5  
automatically activates the selected listening mode whenever a  
new input is selected or a new input source is present. Refer to  
page 3-13 for more information.  
L7 FILM  
DOLBY PLII MOVIE  
dts NEO:6 FILM  
DOLBY PLII + THX  
L7 MUSIC  
5.1 L7 FILM  
dts(-ES) L7 FILM  
MODE SELECTION  
NOT AVAILABLE**  
DOLBY DIGITAL*  
MODE SELECTION  
NOT AVAILABLE**  
dts(-ES)  
dts-ES THX  
5.1 THX*  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 L7 TV  
MODE AND BUTTONS  
dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC  
Music  
TV  
The front panel and remote control Mode and buttons can  
be used to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone  
input source. Pressing these buttons scrolls upward () and  
downward () through listening modes available for the current  
Main Zone source. Listening modes are scrolled in the order that  
appears on the MODE ADJUST menu (5-2).  
MODE SELECTION  
NOT AVAILABLE**  
L7 TV  
*
These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker  
configuration, and certain parameter settings.  
** The "MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE" message appears on the on-screen and  
front panel displays when no listening mode is available for the Main Zone input  
source that is present.  
For example, if a 2-channel input source is present, the Mode ꢀ  
and buttons scroll through available 2-channel listening modes.  
The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left corner of  
the Main Zone two-line status (2-20).  
LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS  
Listening mode descriptions begin on the next page. The table  
beneath each description lists the default and possible settings for  
each listening mode menu parameter. All listening mode menus  
are shown in the Appendix, beginning on page A-10. Listening  
mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page  
5-28.  
MODE FAMILY SELECTION BUTTONS  
The remote control mode family selection buttons can be used to  
activate the LOGIC7 Film, Dolby, dts(-ES), THX, LOGIC7 Music, or  
LOGIC7 TV listening mode that is appropriate for the Main Zone  
input source. For instance, if the L7 button is pressed while a  
2-channel source is present, the L7 FILM listening mode is  
activated. The table at the top of the next column indicates the  
listening modes associated with each mode family selection  
button.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
L7 FILM  
L7 TV  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 TV  
A proprietary listening mode.  
A proprietary listening mode.  
Designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-  
encoded film sources.  
Based on the L7 FILM listening mode, but specifically  
tailored for broadcast sources.  
Derives seven channels from 2-channel input sources, as well as  
full-frequency stereo surround channels that realistically  
increase the perceived width, length, and sense of envelopment  
of the listening space.  
Designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded  
broadcast sources.  
Recommended for 2-channel broadcast sources.  
Provides remarkable improvement compared to other  
decoders.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Recommended for 2-channel film sources.  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
FRONT STEERING  
RE-EQUALIZER  
ON  
ON, OFF  
+0.0dB  
FILM  
OFF  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM  
ON, OFF  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
ON, OFF  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
REAR  
OFF  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
ON, OFF  
+0.0dB  
ON  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
REAR  
OFF  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
ON, OFF  
15.3kHz  
15ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
15.3kHz  
15ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
L7 MUSIC  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
A proprietary listening mode.  
A proprietary listening mode.  
Designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded  
music sources.  
Designed for playback of 2-channel stereo music sources  
recorded in real spaces and for playback of recordings that  
contain added reverb.  
Recommended for 2-channel music sources.  
Extracts ambient sounds from the input source and sends these  
sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heard from all  
directions, creating a realistic playback presentation that  
simulates what listeners experience in real spaces.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
FRONT STEERING  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0.0dB  
MUSIC  
NEUTRAL  
OFF  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
ON, OFF  
Recommended for classical music sources, which are often  
recorded in real spaces with added reverb to enhance the  
stereo mix.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
15.3kHz  
15ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
FRONT STEERING  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0.0dB  
MSURR  
NEUTRAL  
OFF  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
ON, OFF  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
15.3kHz  
15ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
DOLBY PLII + THX  
DOLBY PLII MOVIE  
MODE ADJUST  
%!PLII + THXI  
MODE ADJUST  
%!PLII MOVIE  
Designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Similar to the DOLBY PRO LOGIC listening mode, but uses  
full-frequency stereo surround channels to realistically increase  
the perceived width of the listening space.  
Uses Dolby Pro Logic II decoding to derive five channels from  
Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Decodes five channels from Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs  
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie  
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in  
home theaters without re-equalization.  
Provides impressive enhancement compared to Dolby  
Pro Logic decoding.  
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences  
between the front and surround channels, which results in  
smoother sound movements between them.  
Appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified  
loudspeakers.  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
RE-EQUALIZER  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
ON, OFF  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
DOLBY PLII MUSIC  
DOLBY PRO LOGIC  
MODE ADJUST  
%!PLII MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
%!PRO LOGIC  
Similar to the DOLBY PLII MOVIE listening mode.  
Designed for playback of stereo music sources.  
Designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Decodes four channels from Dolby Surround-encoded sources.  
Uses a mono surround channel with a high-frequency rolloff  
above 7kHz.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Available for comparison purposes, particularly with the L7  
FILM, DOLBY PLII MOVIE, and dts NEO:6 FILM listening  
modes.  
PANORAMA  
CTR WIDTH  
DIMENSION  
SURROUND DLY  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
3
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
0 to 15ms  
NEUTRAL  
10ms  
Option/  
Parameter  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
Listening mode menu parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
Please note the following about dts NEO:6 listening mode  
activation:  
dts NEO:6 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
dts neo:6 FILM  
The dts NEO:6 listening modes cannot be assigned as the  
preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources. However,  
when the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the SDP-5 will  
automatically activate a dts NEO:6 listening mode if a dts  
NEO:6 listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel  
source was present.  
Designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo film  
sources.  
Derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are  
present (rear channels will be in parallel). Derives five channels  
when only side or rear speakers are present. The subwoofer  
channel is generated through bass management in the SDP-5.  
The SDP-5 will not automatically activate the dts NEO:6  
listening modes unless a 44.1 or 48kHz PCM digital source is  
present. The dts NEO:6 listening modes are not available with  
88.2 or 96kHz, Dolby Digital, or analog sources.  
Option/  
Parameter  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
The dts NEO:6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with  
the front panel or remote control Mode and buttons. The  
dts NEO:6 FILM listening mode can also be activated with the  
remote control dts button when a 2-channel input source is  
present.  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
dts NEO:6 MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
dts neo:6 MUSIC  
Designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo music  
sources.  
Derives six channels when both side and rear speakers are  
present (rear channels will be in parallel). Derives five channels  
when only side or rear speakers are present. The subwoofer  
channel is generated through bass management in the SDP-5.  
Option/  
Parameter  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
MODE ADJUST  
NIGHTCLUB  
MODE ADJUST  
CONCERT HALL  
Designed for playback of “dry” music sources that benefit from  
the addition of room reflections, especially music sources that  
lack ambience in the recording.  
Generates early reflections to simulate large listening spaces.  
Sends early reflections to the front, side, and rear channels.  
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode  
uses a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied upon by a  
majority of recording engineers to add ambience to  
recordings.  
Generates early reflections to simulate small, intimate  
listening spaces.  
Sends early reflections to the front, side, and rear channels.  
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode  
uses a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied upon by a  
majority of recording engineers to add ambience to  
recordings.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
12  
0 to 18  
ON  
ON, OFF  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
20m  
1.72s  
OFF  
4 to 20m  
LIVENESS  
30ms to 20.2s  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
-12 to +6dB  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
11  
0 to 18  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
ON  
ON, OFF  
2.4kHz  
-2dB  
5m  
4 to 20m  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
LIVENESS  
196ms  
5ms  
30ms to 20.2s  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
-12 to +6dB  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
9.0kHz  
+3dB  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
MODE ADJUST  
CHURCH  
MODE ADJUST  
CATHEDRAL  
Uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth,  
reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium listening  
spaces with long reverberation time relative to their size, such  
as churches and chambers.  
Similar to the CHURCH listening mode.  
Uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth,  
reverberant decay characteristic of large listening spaces with  
long reverberation time relative to their size, such as  
cathedrals.  
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode uses  
a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied upon by a  
majority of recording engineers to add ambience to  
recordings.  
Unlike other room simulation listening modes, this mode uses  
a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied upon by a  
majority of recording engineers to add ambience to  
recordings.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
5
0 to 18  
ON  
ON, OFF  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
12  
0 to 18  
20m  
1.56s  
1.87s  
24ms  
2.4kHz  
-3dB  
4 to 30m  
ON  
ON, OFF  
MID RT  
24ms to 24.3s  
5ms to 48.6s  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
-12 to +6dB  
30m  
3.72s  
4.47s  
23ms  
3.1kHz  
-8dB  
4 to 30m  
BASS RT  
MID RT  
24ms to 24.3s  
5ms to 48.6s  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
-12 to +6dB  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
BASS RT  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
PANORAMA  
PANORAMA CALIBRATION  
MODE ADJUST  
PANORAMA  
MODE ADJUST  
PANORAMA  
CALIBRATION  
Designed for playback of stereo and matrix-encoded sources.  
The PANORAMA listening mode must be calibrated to take full  
advantage of its effects.  
Uses proprietary JBL Synthesis algorithms to move the stereo  
image outward from the front speakers, producing a wider  
stereo field with greater depth.  
For best results, it is recommended to center the primary  
listening position between the front left and right speakers as  
shown in the illustration centered at the top of page 5-13.  
Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will be calibrated  
with various results.  
Depends on proper location of the listening position and front  
speakers. When the front speakers are positioned close to  
either side of the display device, the effect is produced over a  
wider area than when the front speakers are positioned at a  
large angle from the display device.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
SOURCE  
LEFT & RIGHT  
30deg  
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT  
10 to 90deg  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
SPEAKER ANGLE  
LISTENER POS  
EFFECT LVL  
+4dB  
STEREO  
+0  
-12 to +6dB  
+0  
-127 to +127  
BASS CONTENT  
LOW FREQ WIDTH  
SURR ROLLOFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
INPUT BALANCE  
CALIBRATION  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
BINAURL, MONO, STEREO  
-25 to +25  
Calibration parameter descriptions begin on the next page.  
To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode:  
3.1kHz  
15ms  
<|>  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
1. Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary  
listening position.  
L< to <|> to >R  
2. Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary  
listening position are properly measured. Then, enter these  
distances on the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu.  
Refer to the next page  
3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listening  
position is not centered between the front left and right  
speakers, set the LISTENER POS parameter to compensate for  
the difference. Refer to the LISTENER POS parameter  
description on the next page for assistance.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
. . . Panorama Calibration continues on page 5-12  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
PANORAMA Calibration (continued from page 5-11)  
Note:  
MODE ADJUST  
PANORAMA  
CALIBRATION  
The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived  
direction of the sound, although both the front left  
and right speakers generate the calibration source  
signal.  
To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode: (continued )  
3. Set the SOURCE parameter (next page) to RIGHT.  
4. Begin playback of the calibration source. It is recommended to  
use a familiar stereo source.  
SPEAKER ANGLE  
10 to 90deg  
Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the  
primary listening position. Select the setting closest to the  
angle between the front left and right speakers and the primary  
listening position.  
5. When playback of the calibration source is in progress, set the  
SPEAKER ANGLE parameter (next column) so the sound is not  
heard in the left ear.  
6. Set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT.  
7. When playback of the calibration source is in progress, set the  
SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in the  
right ear.  
LISTENER POS  
-127 to +127  
Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered  
between the front left and right speakers. Each increment within  
the –127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of  
an inch. Refer to the illustrations at the top of the next page for  
more information about the LISTENER POS parameter range.  
8. Set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT to confirm the  
SPEAKER ANGLE and LISTENER POS parameter settings. When  
the PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated, the  
sound should be perceived to come from all around the  
primary listening position. If this does not occur, begin again  
with step 1.  
Note:  
The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend  
past the location of the front left and right speakers.  
SOURCE  
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT  
Controls the perceived direction of the calibration source signal.  
When set to RIGHT, the sound is perceived to come from the right  
of the primary listening position. When set to LEFT, the sound is  
perceived to come from the left of the primary listening position.  
When set to LEFT & RIGHT, the sound is perceived to come from  
all around the primary listening position.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
LISTENER POS Parameter Settings  
Front Left  
Front Right  
Front Left  
Front Right  
Front Left  
Front Right  
60°  
L127  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Center  
.
.
.
.
.
.
R127  
Primary Listening Position  
L127  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Center  
.
.
.
.
.
.
R127  
Negative settings (-127 to -1) compensate  
for primary listening positions located to  
the left of the center between the front left  
and right speakers.  
The +0 setting indicates a primary  
listening position centered between the  
front left and right speakers.  
Positive settings (+1 to +127) compensate  
for primary listening positions located to  
the right of the center between the front  
left and right speakers.  
PARTY  
2-CHANNEL  
MODE ADJUST  
PARTY  
MODE ADJUST  
2-CHANNEL  
Designed for playback of stereo sources.  
Sends stereo sources to all channels.  
Recommended for background music.  
Designed for playback of stereo sources.  
Sends stereo sources to the front and subwoofer channels.  
Recommended for audio purists and comparison purposes  
with other listening modes.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
SUB LEVEL  
CUSTOM  
+0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO  
MODE ADJUST  
MONO  
MODE ADJUST  
MONO LOGIC  
Designed for playback of mono sources.  
Designed for playback of mono sources.  
Sends mono sources to the center channel.  
Uses proprietary JBL Synthesis reverb algorithms to realistically  
expand mono sources to use all channels, dramatically  
increasing the perceived width and sense of envelopment of  
the listening space.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
SUB LEVEL  
CUSTOM  
+0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
EFFECT LVL  
-9dB  
ON  
-12 to +6dB  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON, OFF  
3.1kHz  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
MONO SURROUND  
MODE ADJUST  
MONO SURROUND  
Designed for playback of mono sources.  
Sends mono sources to all channels.  
Option/  
Parameter  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
5.1 L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 TV  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 L7 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 L7 TV  
A proprietary listening mode.  
A proprietary listening mode.  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded  
film sources.  
Based on the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, but specifically  
tailored for broadcast sources.  
Derives seven channels from 5.1-channel input sources. When  
both side and rear speakers are present, the 5.1 L7 FILM  
listening mode also increases the perceived length and sense of  
envelopment of the listening space.  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded  
broadcast sources.  
Recommended for 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded  
broadcast sources.  
Provides remarkable improvement compared to other  
decoders.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Recommended for 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded film  
sources.  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
15ms  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
+0.0dB  
ON  
ON, OFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
15ms  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
+0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 THX, 5.1 THX ULTRA2, & 5.1 THX SurEX  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 THXI OR 5.1 THXI ULTRA2 OR 5.1 THXI SurEX  
A proprietary listening mode.  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film sources.  
Based on the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, but specifically  
tailored for music sources.  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter  
setting, and the speaker setup. The table on the next page  
indicates the conditions in which THX Surround EX and THX  
Ultra2 decoding are engaged.  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded  
music sources.  
Recommended for 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded music  
sources.  
Allows 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources  
without Surround EX encoding.  
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs  
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie  
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in  
home theaters without re-equalization.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences  
between the front and surround channels, which results in  
smoother sound movements between them.  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
When the 5.1 THX ULTRA2 listening mode is activated, ASA  
processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers. Refer  
to the ASA parameter description on page 3-34 for more  
information.  
15ms  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
When the 5.1 THX ULTRA2 listening mode is activated,  
adaptive de-correlation increases the perceived width of the  
listening space. De-correlation of the mono surround channel  
increases the perceived width of the surround field in home  
theaters.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
When the 5.1 THX SurEX listening mode is activated, matrix  
decoding derives three surround channels from 5.1-channel  
Dolby Digital sources.  
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified  
loudspeakers.  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter  
setting, and the speaker setup.  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SURROUND EX  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
ON  
ON, OFF  
The 5.1 THX ULTRA2 listening mode is available when THX  
Ultra2 decoding is engaged.  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
The 5.1 THX SurEX listening mode is available when THX  
Surround EX decoding is engaged.  
+0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
The 5.1 THX listening mode is available when neither THX  
Ultra2 nor Surround EX decoding is engaged.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
The 5.1 THX ULTRA2 and 5.1 THX SurEX listening modes  
cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are  
present.  
The table below indicates the conditions in which THX  
Surround EX and THX Ultra2 decoding are engaged.  
Note:  
THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the SURROUND  
EX parameter is set to ON, or the SURROUND EX parameter is  
set to AUTO and a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source  
with THX Surround EX encoding is detected.  
The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect THX  
Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel  
Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged source does not  
include information in the input signal that identifies  
THX Surround EX encoding.  
THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the SURROUND EX  
parameter is set to OFF, or the SURROUND EX parameter is set  
to AUTO and a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source  
with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.  
Input  
Source  
5.1-Channel  
Dolby Digital  
5.1-Channel Surround EX-Encoded 5.1-Channel Surround EX-Encoded  
Parameter  
Setting  
Dolby Digital (Flagged)  
Dolby Digital (Non-Flagged)  
SURROUND EX: AUTO  
SURROUND EX: ON  
SURROUND EX: OFF  
5.1 THX ULTRA2  
5.1 THX SurEX  
5.1 THX ULTRA2  
5.1 THX SurEX  
5.1 THX SurEX  
5.1 THX ULTRA2  
5.1 THX ULTRA2  
5.1 THX SurEX  
5.1 THX ULTRA2  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
5.1 THX MUSIC  
DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 THXI MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
%!DIGITAL OR %!DIGITAL EX  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music  
sources.  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
The DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for  
Dolby Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX.  
This listening mode can also be used with 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital sources with mixed results.  
The 5.1 THX MUSIC listening mode cannot be activated unless  
side and rear speakers are present.  
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.  
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-34 for more  
information.  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the EX DECODING parameter  
setting, and the speaker setup. The table on the next page  
indicates the conditions in which Dolby Digital Surround EX  
decoding is engaged.  
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified  
loudspeakers.  
Decodes 5.1 discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
sources. The five main channels are full frequency. The .1  
channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited  
frequency range of 120Hz.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
When the DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode is activated,  
matrix decoding derives a surround back channel from the  
other surround channels.  
+0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Note:  
EX DECODING  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
AUTO  
OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
The 5.1 THX MUSIC listening mode can only be  
activated with the front panel or remote control  
Mode and buttons.  
+0.0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
The table below indicates the conditions in which Dolby Digital  
Surround EX decoding is engaged.  
Note:  
The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital  
Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel  
Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged source does not  
include information in the input signal that identifies  
Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged when the EX  
DECODING parameter is set to ON, or the EX DECODING  
parameter is set to AUTO and a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX is  
detected.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged when the  
EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF, or the EX DECODING  
parameter is set to AUTO and a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital source recorded without or without Dolby Digital  
Surround EX is detected.  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the EX DECODING parameter  
setting, and the speaker setup.  
The DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when  
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged.  
The DOLBY DIGITAL listening mode is available when  
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not engaged.  
The DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode cannot be activated  
unless both side and rear speakers are present.  
Input  
5.1-Channel  
Source  
5.1-Channel Dolby  
5.1-Channel Dolby  
Parameter  
Setting  
Dolby Digital  
Digital EX (Flagged)  
Digital EX (Non-Flagged)  
EX DECODING: AUTO  
EX DECODING: ON  
EX DECODING: OFF  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
Designed for converting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded  
input sources into 2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals.  
Designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded mono sources.  
Uses proprietary JBL Synthesis reverb algorithms to realistically  
expand mono sources to use all channels, dramatically  
increasing the perceived width and sense of envelopment of  
the listening space.  
Sends downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals to  
the front speakers and subwoofer.  
Recommended for recording purposes.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
EFFECT LVL  
-9dB  
ON  
-12 to +6dB  
CENTER MIX  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
-25 to +5dB  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON, OFF  
-5 to +5dB  
3.1kHz  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
-127 to +127  
-5 to +5dB  
+0dB  
OFF  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-20.0 to +0.0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
+0.0dB  
+0dB  
SUB LEVEL  
Note:  
CUSTOM  
When a 1.0 Dolby Digital input source is present, the  
SDP-5 automatically activates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC  
listening mode.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 MONO SURR  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1 MONO  
Designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded mono sources.  
Sends mono signals to all channels.  
Designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded mono sources.  
Sends a mono signal to the center channel.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
SUB LEVEL  
CUSTOM  
+0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
dts-ES DECODING  
Note:  
The table below is not applicable to the dts-ES THX,  
dts THX ULTRA2, and dts THX MUSIC listening  
modes.  
The table below indicates the conditions in which dts-ES  
decoding is engaged.  
dts-ES decoding is engaged when the ES DECODING  
parameter is set to ON, or the ES DECODING parameter is set  
to AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel  
discrete-encoded dts-ES source is detected.  
dts-ES decoding is not engaged when the ES DECODING  
parameter is set to OFF, or the ES DECODING parameter is set  
to AUTO and a 5.1-channel dts source is detected.  
Listening mode names differ depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter  
setting, and the speaker setup.  
dts-ES listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding  
is engaged.  
dts listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding is  
not engaged.  
dts-ES listening modes cannot be activated unless both side  
and rear speakers are present.  
Input  
Source  
5.1-Channel  
Matrix-Encoded dts-ES  
6.1-Channel  
Discrete-Encoded dts-ES  
5.1-Channel dts  
Parameter  
Setting  
ES DECODING: AUTO  
ES DECODING: ON  
ES DECODING: OFF  
dts  
dts-ES  
dts  
dts-ES  
dts-ES  
dts  
dts-ES  
dts-ES  
dts  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
dts(-ES) L7 FILM  
dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
dts-ES L7 FILM  
MODE ADJUST  
dts-ES L7 MUSIC  
A proprietary listening mode.  
A proprietary listening mode.  
Designed for playback of 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) film  
sources.  
Designed for playback of 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) music  
sources.  
Uses an advanced matrix to derive seven channels from 5.1  
and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) sources. When both side and rear  
speakers are present , the dts(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode also  
increases the perceived length and sense of envelopment of  
the listening space.  
Based on the dts(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode, but specifically  
tailored for music sources.  
Recommended for 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) music sources.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Provides remarkable improvement compared to other  
decoders.  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
Recommended for 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) film sources.  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
15ms  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
ON, OFF  
ES DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OFF  
ON, OFF  
ON  
ON, OFF  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
15ms  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
ES DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
When the dts THX ULTRA2 listening mode is activated, ASA  
processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers. Refer  
to the ASA parameter description on page 3-34 for more  
information.  
dts THX ULTRA2 & dts-ES THX  
MODE ADJUST  
ULTRA2 OR dts-ES THX1  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel dts, 5.1-channel matrix-  
encoded dts-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded dts-ES film  
sources.  
When the dts THX ULTRA2 listening mode is activated,  
adaptive de-correlation increases the perceived width of the  
listening space. De-correlation of the mono surround channel  
increases the perceived width of the surround field in home  
theaters.  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter  
setting, and the speaker setup. The table below indicates the  
conditions in which THX Ultra2 and dts-ES decoding are  
engaged.  
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified  
loudspeakers.  
Allows 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel dts sources without  
dts-ES encoding.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs  
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie  
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in  
home theaters without re-equalization.  
RE-EQUALIZER  
LFE MIX  
ON  
ON, OFF  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
ES DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences  
between the front and surround channels, which results in  
smoother sound movements between them.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
Input  
Source  
5.1-Channel  
Matrix-Encoded dts-ES  
6.1-Channel  
Discrete-Encoded dts-ES  
5.1-Channel dts  
Parameter  
Setting  
ES DECODING: AUTO  
ES DECODING: ON  
ES DECODING: OFF  
dts THX ULTRA2  
dts-ES THX  
dts-ES THX  
dts-ES THX  
dts-ES THX  
dts-ES THX  
dts THX ULTRA2  
dts THX ULTRA2  
dts THX ULTRA2  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
The table at the bottom of the previous page indicates the  
conditions in which THX Ultra2 and dts-ES decoding are  
engaged.  
dts THX MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
DTS THX MUSIC  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel dts music sources.  
THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the ES DECODING  
parameter is set to OFF, or the ES DECODING parameter is set  
to AUTO and a 5.1-channel dts source is detected.  
The dts THX MUSIC listening mode cannot be activated unless  
side and rear speakers are present.  
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.  
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-34 for more  
information.  
dts-ES decoding is engaged when the ES DECODING  
parameter is set to ON, or the ES DECODING parameter is set  
to AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel  
discrete-encoded dts-ES source is detected.  
Recommended for home theaters with THX-certified  
loudspeakers.  
Listening mode name differs depending on the encoding  
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter  
setting, and the speaker setup.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
The dts THX ULTRA2 listening mode is available when THX  
Ultra2 decoding is engaged.  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
The dts-ES THX listening mode is available when dts-ES  
decoding is engaged.  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
The dts THX ULTRA2 and dts(-ES) THX listening modes  
cannot be activated unless side and rear speakers are  
present.  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
Note:  
The dts THX MUSIC listening mode can only be  
activated with the front panel or remote control  
Mode and buttons.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
dts(-ES)  
dts(-ES) 2-CHAN  
MODE ADJUST  
dts-ES  
MODE ADJUST  
dts-ES 2-CHAN  
Designed for playback of 5.1- and 6.1-channel dts(-ES) sources.  
Designed for converting 5.1- or 6.1-channel dts(-ES) sources  
into 2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals.  
Decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from dts(-ES)  
sources. The six main channels are full-frequency. The .1  
channel, often referred to as LFE information, has a limited  
frequency range of 120Hz.  
Sends downmixed 5.1- or 6.1-channel dts(-ES) input signals to  
the front speakers and subwoofer.  
Recommended for recording purposes.  
Appropriate for dts(-ES) film sources.  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Option/  
Parameter  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
CENTER MIX  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
LFE MIX  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
-25 to +5dB  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
-10.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
-5 to +5dB  
ES DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
-127 to +127  
-5 to +5dB  
+0dB  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
+0dB  
-20.0 to +0.0dB  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
ES DECODING  
SUB LEVEL  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
5.1a BYPASS  
2CH BYPASS  
MODE ADJUST  
5.1a BYPASS  
MODE ADJUST  
2CH BYPASS  
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources, such as  
DVD-A or SACD players.  
Designed for playback of 2-channel analog sources.  
Analog audio input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Front L/R. These input signals  
receive no internal processing.  
The 5.1-channel analog input connectors are sent directly to  
the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors as  
shown on page 3-46. These signals receive no internal  
processing.  
The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated  
when a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the MAIN  
ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.  
When both side and rear speakers are present, surround  
channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers.  
To configure a 5-channel speaker setup, set the OUTPUT  
LEVELS menu SIDE L/R or REAR L/R parameter to OFF to  
deactivate the associated surround speakers.  
The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is not available when the  
MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO and  
a digital audio source is present.  
No parameters are available for the 2CH BYPASS listening  
mode.  
The 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated  
whenever one of the 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors  
is assigned to the selected input.  
The 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is the only listening mode  
available for 5.1-channel analog sources.  
Note:  
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances, and  
audio (tone) controls are not available when the 2CH  
BYPASS listening mode is activated.  
Option/  
Parameter  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 5-28.  
Note:  
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances, and  
audio (tone) controls are not available when the 5.1a  
BYPASS listening mode is activated.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION & PARAMETER  
DESCRIPTIONS  
BASS CONTENT  
BINAURL, MONO, STEREO  
Adjusts the bass content of binaural, mono, and stereo recordings.  
When set to BINAURL, the SDP-5 activates low-frequency  
compensation. Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded  
with dummy head microphones. Select the MONO setting for  
sources recorded with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting for  
sources recorded with stereo bass.  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
ON, OFF  
Simulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker configurations.  
When set to ON, the SDP-5 provides an increased sense of  
spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers.  
This enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers  
are positioned to the side of the primary listening position, or when  
the primary listening position is located against the rear wall. The  
effectiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space. For  
best results, it is recommended to position the surround speakers  
to the left and right sides of the primary listening position.  
BASS ENHANCE  
ON, OFF  
Enhances stereo bass, which results in low-frequency reproduction  
that is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space. The  
effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies depending  
on room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to  
reproduce low frequencies. It is recommended to use front, side, or  
rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of 40Hz  
or lower.  
ACADEMY FILTER  
ON, OFF  
When set to ON, restores the proper tonal balance of older mono  
film sources that have much narrower frequency responses than  
more recent mono film sources.  
Note:  
When the BASS ENHANCE parameter is set to ON,  
most listening spaces have a 2 to 3dB reduction in  
low-frequency energy. It is recommended to use the  
AUDIO CONTROLS menu BASS parameter to  
compensate for this reduction.  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
ON, OFF  
Maximizes matrix steering accuracy. When set to ON, the SDP-5  
continually monitors the 2-channel input signal and automatically  
adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to  
ensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with  
maximum separation. When set to OFF, the accuracy of the  
selected listening mode varies among sources. It is recommended  
to set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to  
OFF for music sources.  
When set to ON, the BASS ENHANCE parameter might  
damage speakers that are not capable of producing low  
frequencies below 80Hz.  
CAUTION  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
BASS RT  
5ms to 48.6s  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
-127 to +127  
Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount  
of time required for low-frequency information to decay below  
60dB in level. The BASS RT parameter setting should match the  
MID RT parameter setting for more natural effects in smaller  
listening spaces.  
Controls the relative time offset of the center channel. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to +0 unless the center channel  
is not properly timed and the value of the error is known.  
COMPRESSION  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialog  
intelligibility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input  
sources. When set to ON, full compression is applied regardless of  
volume level. When set to OFF, compression is not applied. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to AUTO or ON for Dolby  
Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels,  
especially for night time viewing to avoid disturbing others.  
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT, and SIZE parameters to a high  
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.  
CAUTION  
CALIBRATION  
Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu, which  
can be used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. Refer to  
page 5-11 for more information.  
CTR WIDTH  
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX  
Adjusts the center image. When set to MIN, the center image is  
heard from just the center speaker. When set to MAX, the center  
image is heard from just the front left and right speakers as a  
“phantom” center image. When set on the 1 to 6 scale, the center  
image is heard in various combinations of the front and center  
speakers.  
CENTER  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
MODE ADJUST  
(Listening Mode)  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CENTER  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Center.  
CENTER DEPTH  
0 to 18  
CUSTOM  
Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel,  
changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Higher  
settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived  
distance of the center speaker from the listening position.  
MODE ADJUST  
(Listening Mode)  
CUSTOM  
Opens the CUSTOM menu, which can be used to compare custom  
and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to  
restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode.  
CENTER MIX  
-25 to +5dB  
. . . Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-30  
Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to +0dB for film sources and  
-5dB for music sources.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions  
DIMENSION  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
(continued from page 5-29)  
Controls the relative balance of the sound field, which can be  
useful with certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance  
among all speakers. When set to FRONT, the sound field is balanced  
toward the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, the  
sound field is balanced at the center of the listening space. When  
set to REAR, the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the  
listening space.  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
MODE ADJUST  
(Listening Mode)  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory-default  
versions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected,  
the listening mode is heard in its factory-default condition – as if all  
parameters had been restored to their factory-default settings. No  
parameter settings are affected when this option is selected. The  
listening mode will revert to its modified condition when the  
CUSTOM VS PRESET option is closed.  
EFFECT LVL  
-12 to +6dB  
Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode.  
ES DECODING  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
Controls the dts-ES decoding feature, which can be used to extract  
a rear channel from dts sources.  
When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard in its  
custom condition – with all of its current parameter settings. The  
CUSTOM option is available even when no parameter settings have  
been adjusted. However, the PRESET and CUSTOM options will  
sound identical until adjustments are made.  
When set to ON, dts-ES decoding is engaged for all dts(-ES)  
sources.  
When set to OFF, dts-ES decoding is not engaged for all dts(-ES)  
sources.  
To toggle between the factory-default and modified versions of  
the selected listening mode:  
When set to AUTO, dts-ES decoding is engaged when a  
5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded  
dts-ES source is detected. dts-ES decoding is not engaged  
when a 5.1-channel dts source is detected.  
1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the  
CUSTOM VS PRESET drop-down menu.  
2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET drop-down menu opens, press  
the Menu and arrows to toggle between the PRESET  
(factory-default) and CUSTOM (customized) versions of the  
selected listening mode.  
dts-ES listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding is  
engaged. dts listening modes are available when dts-ES decoding  
is not engaged. dts-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both  
side and rear speakers are present. Refer to page 5-22 for more  
information.  
3. When finished, press the Menu arrow to close the CUSTOM  
VS PRESET menu.  
4. Press the Menu arrow to close the CUSTOM menu and  
return to the listening mode menu.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote  
control dts button while a dts(-ES) input source is present toggles  
the ES DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON, and  
OFF settings.  
The DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby  
Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged. The DOLBY DIGITAL  
listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX  
decoding is not engaged. Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding  
cannot be engaged unless both side and rear speakers are present.  
Refer to page 5-18 for more information.  
Note:  
The dts(-ES) STATUS menu includes the SB level meter  
when:  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote  
control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input  
source is present activates the DOLBY DIGITAL EX or DOLBY DIGITAL  
listening mode. Subsequent presses toggle the EX DECODING  
parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.  
The ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a  
5.1-channel dts source is present.  
The ES DECODING parameter is set to AUTO and  
a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel  
discrete-encoded dts-ES source is present.  
FRONT STEERING  
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM  
Adjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and center  
speakers. When set to FILM, maximum front steering is applied to  
the center channel. When set to MUSIC, moderate front steering is  
applied. When set to MSURR, minimum front steering is applied.  
When set to OFF, no front steering is applied. It is recommended to  
set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources and to  
MUSIC, MSURR, or OFF for music sources.  
EX DECODING  
Controls the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding feature, which  
can be used to extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby  
Digital sources.  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
When set to ON, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is  
engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
When set to OFF, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not  
engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
INPUT BALANCE  
L< to <|> to >R  
Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input  
connectors, compensating for audio input sources with audible  
channel imbalance.  
When set to AUTO, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is  
engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source  
recorded with Surround EX is detected. Dolby Digital Surround  
EX decoding is not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel  
Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Surround EX is  
detected.  
. . . Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-32  
The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround  
EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
A non-flagged source does not include information in the input  
signal that identifies Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions  
MASTER LEVEL  
-5 to +5dB  
(continued from page 5-31)  
Adjusts the output level of 2-channel LOGIC7-encoded sources.  
LFE MIX  
-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB  
MID RT  
24ms to 24.3s  
Controls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a  
5.1- or 6.1-channel input source – that is sent to the Main Zone  
audio output labeled Subwoofer. Low frequencies from up to seven  
other channels might be combined with the LFE information to  
create the subwoofer output signal, which significantly increases  
subwoofer output levels. Careful adjustment of this parameter  
allows achievement of proper tonal balance and reduces the risk of  
subwoofer overload. When the speaker setup does not include a  
subwoofer, LFE information is mixed into speakers for which the  
corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu parameter is set to FULL or  
to the lowest crossover points.  
Works with the BASS RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount  
of time required for mid-frequency information to decay below  
60dB in level.  
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT, or SIZE parameters to a high  
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.  
CAUTION  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
MODE ADJUST  
(Listening Mode)  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which can be used to adjust  
output levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled  
Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R, and Rear L/R. The OUTPUT LEVELS  
option does not appear on listening mode menus when the  
listening mode does not accommodate multi-channel output  
signals. Instead, an output-specific parameter appears. For  
instance, the Mono listening mode menu includes a SUB LEVEL  
parameter.  
LISTENER POS  
Refer to page 5-12.  
-127 to +127  
LIVENESS  
30ms to 20.2s  
Depends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameter  
adjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimic  
more reflective surfaces and increase decay time.  
Option/  
Default  
Setting  
Possible  
Settings  
Parameter  
LOW FREQ WIDTH  
Applies low-frequency spatial correction to the input signal. This  
correction is applied to un-correlated input signals below 60Hz.  
-25 to +25dB  
CENTER  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
PANORAMA  
ON, OFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
When set to ON, extends the front stereo image to include  
surround channel signals, which creates a “wraparound” effect  
with side wall imaging.  
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying  
the arrival time of rear speaker signals. It is recommended to  
increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are  
located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired  
in the listening space.  
Note:  
The DOLBY PLII MUSIC listening mode PANORAMA  
parameter should not be confused with the separate  
PANORAMA listening mode (5-11).  
REAR L/R  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
MODE ADJUST  
(Listening Mode) OUTPUT LEVELS  
REAR L/R  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Rear L/R.  
PRE-DELAY  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of  
reverberation. Higher settings make the simulated space sound  
larger. Because some pre-delay is inherent in all source material, it  
is recommended to begin with the parameter set to OFF, then  
make adjustments accordingly.  
RESET MODE  
MODE ADJUST  
(Listening Mode)  
CUSTOM  
RESET MODE  
Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,  
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory-  
default settings.  
RE-EQUALIZER  
ON, OFF  
Simulates high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters.  
When set to ON, the SDP-5 applies a high-frequency filter. When set  
to OFF, the SDP-5 does not apply a high-frequency filter. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to ON for film sources, as  
many films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too  
bright when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.  
To restore the factory-default version of the selected listening  
mode:  
1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path. The “PRESS RIGHT V TO  
RESTORE MODE” drop-down message.  
2. When the drop-down message opens, press the Menu ꢂ  
arrow to restore the factory-default version of the selected  
listening mode and close the message. Press the Menu ꢃ  
arrow to close the message without restoring the factory-  
default version of the selected listening mode.  
. . . Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-34  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions  
SIZE  
4 to 20 or 30m  
(continued from page 5-33)  
Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4 to 20 or 30m  
range (depending on the listening mode). Increase the size of the  
space to increase the reverb effect.  
RESET MODE (continued)  
MODE ADJUST  
(Listening Mode)  
CUSTOM  
RESET MODE  
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT, and SIZE parameters to a high  
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.  
CAUTION  
3. Press the Menu arrow to close the CUSTOM menu and  
return to the listening mode menu.  
SOUND STAGE  
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR  
Note:  
Dynamically controls the relative balance of the Main Zone audio  
output connectors. When set to FRONT, Side L/R and Rear L/R  
output levels are attenuated by 6dB, shifting the perceived balance  
of the sound field to the front of the listening space. When set to  
NEUTRAL, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are slightly  
attenuated by 3dB, shifting the perceived balance of the sound  
field to the center of the listening space. When set to REAR, Side  
L/R and Rear L/R output levels are not attenuated, preserving the  
intended balance of the sound field.  
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is  
selected to restore the factory-default version of the  
selected listening mode, the corresponding TRIGGER  
SETUP menu listening mode parameter is  
automatically set to OFF.  
ROLLOFF  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space. It  
is recommended to begin with a low setting to simulate  
high-frequency absorbative spaces.  
SOURCE  
Refer to page 5-12.  
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT  
10 to 90deg  
SIDE L/R  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
SPEAKER ANGLE  
Refer to page 5-12.  
MODE ADJUST  
(Listening Mode)  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
SIDE L/R  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Side L/R.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
SDP-5  
SPEECH DETECT  
ON, OFF  
SURROUND DLY  
0 to 15ms  
Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When set  
to ON, effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural  
echo in monaural speech. When stereo input sources are  
present, the front left and right channels are independently used as  
inputs for ambience synthesis. When strong monaural speech is  
present in the input source, the monaural component of the  
ambience effect is reduced and the stereo component of the effect  
is increased. When set to OFF, the amount of ambience synthesis is  
dynamically controlled.  
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying  
the arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is  
recommended to increase the setting when a greater sense of  
depth is desired in the listening space.  
SURROUND EX  
AUTO, ON, OFF  
Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be  
used to extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
sources.  
When set to ON, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all  
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
SUB LEVEL  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Subwoofer. The SUB LEVEL parameter appears  
on listening mode menus when the listening mode does not  
accommodate multi-channel output signals.  
When set to OFF, THX Surround EX decoding is not engaged  
for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.  
When set to AUTO, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged  
when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX  
Surround EX encoding is detected. THX Surround EX decoding  
is not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital  
source with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.  
SUBWOOFER  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
MODE ADJUST  
(Listening Mode)  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
SUBWOOFER  
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Subwoofer.  
The SDP-5 cannot automatically detect THX Surround EX  
encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A  
non-flagged source does not include information in the input  
signal that identifies THX Surround EX encoding.  
SURR ROLLOFF  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
Applies high-frequency attenuation control to the Main Zone audio  
output connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only  
applied to output signals generated by the SDP-5.  
The 5.1 THX SurEX listening mode is available when THX Surround  
EX decoding is engaged. The 5.1 THX and 5.1 THX ULTRA2  
listening modes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is  
not engaged. THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged  
unless both side and rear speakers are present. Refer to page 5-16  
for more information.  
. . . Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions continues on page 5-36  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE ADJUST  
JBL Synthesis  
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions  
(continued from page 5-31)  
SURROUND EX (continued)  
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the remote  
control THX button while a 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input source  
is present activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX ULTRA2, or 5.1 THX  
SurEX listening mode.  
Note:  
Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting  
produces low-level clicks in the front speakers.  
SURROUND MIX  
-5 to +5dB  
Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to  
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is  
recommended to set this parameter to +2 or +3dB for all input  
sources.  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB  
Controls the level of dialog boost in the Main Zone audio output  
connector labeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog  
intelligibility, particularly at lower volume levels.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Restoring Factory-Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
JBL Synthesis  
3. Make sure audio has not been muted. The message “MUTE  
ON” or “FULL MUTE ON” will appear on the on-screen and  
front panel displays when audio has been muted. To deactivate  
mute, press the front panel or remote control Mute button or  
use the front panel volume knob or the remote control VOL  
and buttons to adjust volume level.  
The SDP-5 does not power on.  
1. Attempt to power on the SDP-5 with the front panel standby  
button and remote control On button.  
4. Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN  
parameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is  
assigned to the selected input. Refer to page 3-6 for more  
information.  
2. Make sure the rear panel power switch is set to the c (“on”)  
position.  
3. Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between  
the rear panel AC input connector and the wall outlet.  
5. Make sure the SDP-5 is receiving an audio signal. To do this,  
follow the instructions that begin on page 2-18 to open the  
STATUS menu for the current input source.  
4. Check the electrical circuit and breaker.  
6. Make sure all associated power amplifiers are powered on.  
The remote control does not work.  
1. Make sure the front panel IR receiver window shown on page  
2-3 is not obstructed. The remote control must be in line-of-  
sight with the receiver for proper operation. Refer to page 2-9  
for more information.  
Dialog sounds muffled.  
1. If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make  
sure a custom – as opposed to a JBL Synthesis – speaker setup  
is selected. Then, make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu  
CENTER parameter is set to NONE (3-29).  
2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted  
with the proper polarity. Refer to page 1-5 for instructions to  
install new batteries.  
A humming sound is present in the audio.  
The SDP-5 is powered on, but there is no audio.  
1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable from  
the wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a ground  
loop isolation device is required. Contact your dealer or the  
cable provider for assistance.  
1. Examine the audio cables to ensure a good connection to the  
associated amplifier.  
2. Make sure volume level is audible. Volume level can be  
increased with the front panel volume knob (2-3) or the  
remote control VOL and buttons (2-14).  
2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.  
Once the problem is identified, make sure the associated  
component is properly grounded and connected to the same  
electrical circuit as the SDP-5.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
SDP-5  
2. Document all user-defined settings on the installation  
worksheet that begins on page A-14. Then, follow the  
instructions on the next page to restore factory-default  
settings.  
The SDP-5 is powered on, but there is no video.  
1. Examine the video cables – particularly the S-video cables – to  
ensure a good connection to the associated component.  
2. Check the INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN (page 3-11) and  
COMPONENT IN (page 3-12) parameters to ensure the  
appropriate video connector is assigned to the selected input.  
3. Contact an authorized JBL Synthesis dealer.  
4. Contact JBL Synthesis customer service at 818-830-8757.  
Note:  
Visit  
RF interference is present in the audio or video.  
www.jblsynthesis.com  
for  
additional  
1. Make sure the SDP-5 is not positioned near unshielded TV or  
FM antennas, cable TV decoders, and other RF-emitting  
devices.  
troubleshooting information.  
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE  
The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that  
should be performed on a periodic basis.  
2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever  
possible.  
The SDP-5 is exhibiting erratic behavior.  
Clean the SDP-5 exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do  
not use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners, or strong  
commercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel wool  
or metal polish. If the SDP-5 is exposed to a dusty  
environment, a low-pressure blower can be used to remove  
dust from its exterior surface.  
1. Set the rear panel power switch to the | (“off”) position. Wait  
10 seconds. Then, set the rear panel power switch to the c  
(“on”) position.  
2. Document all user-defined settings on the installation  
worksheet that begins on page A-14. Then, follow the  
instructions on the next page to restore factory-default  
settings.  
Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remote  
control requires two AA batteries. When these batteries are low  
on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition  
that prevents it from operating the SDP-5. When this occurs,  
follow the instructions on page 1-5 to replace the batteries.  
Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.  
If all else fails . . .  
1. Set the rear panel power switch to the | (“off”) position. Wait  
10 seconds. Then, set the rear panel power switch to the c  
(“on”) position.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting & Maintenance  
JBL Synthesis  
is pressed, too much time has passed. If this occurs, begin  
again with step 2.  
RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGS  
When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and  
user-defined values are restored to their factory-default settings.  
Before restoring factory-default settings, it is recommended to  
record all user-defined settings on the installation worksheet that  
begins on page A-14.  
5. Press the remote control Menu and arrows to highlight  
the desired option. Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option to  
restore factory-default settings. Highlight the EXIT option to  
close the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factory-  
default settings.  
To restore factory-default settings:  
1. Record all user-defined settings on the installation worksheet  
that begins on page A-14. When factory-default settings are  
restored, all parameters and user-defined values are restored to  
their factory-default settings.  
6. When the desired option is highlighted, press the Menu ꢂ  
arrow to select this option.  
If the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected, the  
FACTORY SETTINGS message shown below appears on the  
on-screen and front panel displays. When this message  
appears, press a front panel or remote control button to  
restart the SDP-5.  
2. If the SDP-5 is powered on, press the front panel standby  
button or the remote control Off button to activate standby  
mode and deactivate the SDP-5. If the SDP-5 is in standby  
mode, proceed to step 3.  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
EXIT  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
HAVE BEEN RESTORED  
PRESS ANY KEY  
TO RESTART  
3. Press the front panel standby button or the remote control On  
button to deactivate standby mode and activate the SDP-5.  
If the EXIT option is selected, the FACTORY SETTINGS  
menu will close and the two-line status (2-18) opens on  
the on-screen and front panel displays.  
4. Quickly press and hold the front panel or remote control Mute  
button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu shown below  
opens on the on-screen and front panel displays.  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
EXIT  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
The Mute button must be pressed within 2 seconds of  
activating the SDP-5. If the message "MUTE ON" appears on  
the on-screen and front panel displays when the Mute button  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
Appendix  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Declaration of Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
JBL Synthesis  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Audio Input & Output Connectors  
Main Zone Audio Performance (continued)  
Analog Audio Inputs  
• 8 stereo (RCA) or 5 stereo and one 5.1-channel or 2  
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors  
Input Impedance  
Output Level  
• 100kin parallel with 150pF  
• 150mVrms typical, 6Vrms maximum (RCA connectors)  
Digital Audio Inputs  
• 4 S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and 4 S/PDIF optical (TosLink)  
connectors  
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume  
at +6dB  
• Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC-  
958, S/PDIF standards  
Output Impedance  
• 100in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)  
• 50in parallel with 150pF (XLR connectors)  
• Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96kHz sample rates  
• Accepts 16-24 bits PCM audio, Dolby Digital, dts, and  
dts-ES discrete data formats  
Zone 2 Audio Performance  
Main Zone Audio  
Outputs  
• 8 unbalanced (RCA) connectors for Front L/R, Center,  
Subwoofer, Side L/R, and Rear L/R  
D/A Conversion  
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multi-bit ∆∑ architecture  
Frequency Response  
• 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/-0.25dB, -0.75dB at 40kHz,  
reference 1kHz  
Zone 2 Audio Outputs • 1 unbalanced (RCA, variable output level) stereo  
connector  
THD + Noise  
• Below 0.005% at 1kHz, maximum output level  
• 103dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth  
• 1 S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) connector  
Dynamic Range  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Input Sensitivity  
Input Impedance  
Output Level  
• 103dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth  
• 200mVrms (4Vrms for maximum output level)  
• 100kin parallel with 150pF  
Main Zone Audio Performance  
A/D Conversion  
D/A Conversion  
Frequency Response  
• 24-bit, 96kHz, dual-bit ∆∑ architecture  
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multi-bit ∆∑ architecture  
• 200mVrms typical, 4Vrms maximum (RCA connectors)  
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume  
at 0dB  
• 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.05dB/-0.1dB, -0.5dB at 40kHz,  
reference 1kHz  
Output Impedance  
• 100in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)  
THD + Noise  
• Below 0.008% at 1kHz, maximum output level  
• 108dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth  
• 108dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth  
Dynamic Range  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Input Sensitivity  
• 200mVrms (2Vrms for maximum output level) at 0dB  
input gain  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
SDP-5  
Video Input & Output Connectors  
Component Video Performance (continued)  
Video Inputs  
• 5 composite (RCA), 5 S-video, and 3 component  
video (RCA)  
Insertion Loss  
Bandwidth  
• <3dB  
• >150MHz  
Video Outputs  
• 2 composite (RCA, 1 monitor and 1 Zone2), 2 S-video  
(1 monitor and 1 Zone2), and 1 component (RCA)  
Other  
Trigger Outputs  
• 1 power on/off and 1 programmable connector on  
detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)  
Composite & S-video Performance  
Compatibility  
Switching  
• NTSC, PAL, and SECAM  
• Active  
RS-232 Serial Input/ • 2 9-pin D-sub connectors  
Output  
Output Level  
Impedance  
• 1.0V peak-to-peak  
• 75Ω  
Power Requirements  
• 90-250 VAC, 50-60Hz, 60W (universal line input),  
detachable power cord  
SDP-5  
Dimensions & Weight  
• Height (with feet): 5.04 inches (128mm)  
• Width: 17.3 inches (440mm)  
• Depth: 14.85 inches (377mm)  
• Weight: 24lbs (10.7kg)  
Input Return Loss  
Differential Gain  
Differential Phase  
Bandwidth  
• >40dB  
• <0.5%  
• <0.5°  
• >25MHz  
• <0.3%  
Rack Mounting  
Environment  
• Brackets are provided for installation in a standard 19"  
equipment rack (3 rack units required).  
K Factor  
• Operating Temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)  
• Storage Temperature: -30° to 75°C (-22° to 167°F)  
• Relative Humidity: 95% maximum without condensation  
Gain  
0.15dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Frequency Response  
• >65dB  
• 10Hz to 10MHz + 0.1/-0.3dB  
Remote Control  
• Hand-held, backlit infrared remote control unit  
• Requires 2 AA batteries (Alkaline batteries recommended)  
Component Video Performance  
Compatibility  
Switching  
• 3-channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independent  
• Passive  
Impedance  
• 75Ω  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
JBL Synthesis  
MENU TREE  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
The menu tree that begins on the next page is based on Software  
Version 1.0.  
Application of Council Directive(s):  
89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC  
Standard(s) to which Conformity is Declared:  
EN55022:1994 + A1:1995 + A2:1997, EN55024:1998,  
EN61000-3-2: 2000, EN61000-3-3:2000, and  
EN60065: 1998  
Manufacturer:  
Lexicon, Inc.  
3 Oak Park  
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA  
The equipment identified here conforms to the Directive(s)  
and Standard(s) specified above.  
Type of Equipment:  
Model:  
Digital Controller  
JBL Synthesis SDP-5  
February 2003  
Date:  
Lexicon, Inc.  
Vice President of Engineering  
3 Oak Park  
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA  
Tel: 781-280-0300  
Fax: 781-280-0490  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
TRIGGER SETUP  
REMOTE ONLY  
DVD1  
DVD2  
SAT  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
ZONE2 INPUTS  
L7 FILM  
L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
%!PLII + THX  
%!PLII MOVIE  
%!PLII MUSIC  
%!PRO LOGIC  
dts neo:6 FILM  
dts neo:6 MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
FOR REAR PANEL CFG  
INPUT SETUP  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
OR  
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG  
OR  
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG  
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP  
MAIN PWR ON -30dB  
MUTE LEVEL FULL MUTE  
ZONE PWR ON -30dB  
LOCK OPTIONS  
MODES UNLOCKED  
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED  
SETUP UNLOCKED  
DVD1  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG  
FOR REAR PANEL CFG  
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB  
LOCKED  
UNLOCKED  
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG  
FOR REAR PANEL CFG  
-10dB  
-20dB  
-30dB  
-40dB  
FULL MUTE  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
continued on page A-6  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
PARTY  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
5.1 L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 TV  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 THXI SurEX  
5.1 THXI MUSIC  
%! DIGITAL EX  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
DTS-ES L7 FILM  
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
DTS-ES THX  
DTS THXI MUSIC  
DTS-ES  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
DISPLAY SETUP  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
OFF  
OFF  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
R
SR  
RR  
STATUS  
BRIGHTNESS  
ALWAYS ON  
75%  
STATUS  
2 SECONDS  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
POSITION  
FORMAT  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
TOP  
NTSC  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF, 1 to 60ms  
C
L
100%  
80Hz  
ON  
75%  
50%  
25%  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
SDP-5  
80Hz  
80Hz  
ON  
OFF  
^
continued on page A-8  
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT  
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS  
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE  
ALWAYS ON  
2 SECONDS  
ALWAYS OFF  
SECAM  
PAL  
NTSC  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
TOP  
CENTER  
BOTTOM  
DTS-ES 2-CHAN  
5.1a BYPASS  
2CH BYPASS  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
JBL  
Menu Tree (continued from page A-5)  
Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of the desired input (e.g.  
DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown below. The  
parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of which input  
is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter  
settings differ from input to input. The INPUT SETUP menus shown below indicate default  
parameter settings for each input.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
INPUT SETUP  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
CD  
LOCK OPTIONS  
TUNER  
AUX  
continued from page A-5  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
SAT INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
TV INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
TUNER INPUT SETUP  
DVD1  
SAT  
TV  
NAME  
TUNER  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
OPTICAL-1  
ANALOG-1  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-3  
3
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
OPTICAL-2  
ANALOG-3  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-5  
NONE  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
NONE  
ANALOG-4  
+0dB  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
NONE  
NONE  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
L7 FILM  
L7 TV  
L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
%!D  
5.1 L7 TV  
%!D  
5.1 L7 TV  
%!D  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM-  
MAIN ADVANCED  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
ZONE2 IN  
ANLG  
ZONE2 IN  
ANLG  
ZONE2 IN  
ANLG  
AUX  
DVD2 INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
VCR INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
CD INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
AUX INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-2  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
DVD2  
COAX-2  
NONE  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-2  
2
VCR  
NONE  
ANALOG-2  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-4  
NONE  
CD  
COAX-3  
NONE  
OPTICAL-3  
NONE  
+0dB  
+0dB  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
NONE  
L7 MUSIC  
NONE  
L7 MUSIC  
L7 FILM  
L7 FILM  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
%!D  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
%!D  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
MAIN ADVANCED  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
MAIN ADVANCED  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
ZONE2 IN  
ANLG  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
SDP-5  
Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the  
corresponding menu shown below. These menus are  
identical regardless of which input is selected. The DVD1  
INPUT SETUP menu is shown at the left as an example.  
Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu shown  
on the previous page may be substituted.  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
INPUT SETUP  
DVD1 INPUT SETUP  
NAME DVD1  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
DVD1  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
COAX-1  
NONE  
+0dB  
S-VIDEO-1  
1
L7 FILM  
%!D  
5.1 L7 FILM  
DTS-ES DTS-ES L7 FILM  
MAIN ADVANCED  
DIGITAL  
ANLG  
DMIX  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
AUTO  
continued from page A-6  
ZONE2 IN  
DIGITAL  
DVD1 INPUT NAME  
DVD1 ANALOG IN  
DVD1 VIDEO IN  
DVD1 COMPONENT  
DVD1 %!D MODE  
DVD1 MAIN ADV*  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME  
ANALOG-1  
ANALOG-2  
ANALOG-3  
ANALOG-4  
ANALOG-5  
ANALOG-6  
ANALOG-7  
ANALOG-8  
NONE  
COMPOSITE-1  
COMPOSITE-2  
COMPOSITE-3  
COMPOSITE-4  
COMPOSITE-5  
S-VIDEO-1  
S-VIDEO-2  
S-VIDEO-3  
S-VIDEO-4  
S-VIDEO-5  
COMPONENT-1  
COMPONENT-2  
COMPONENT-3  
NONE  
5.1 L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 TV  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 THX  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3  
COMPONENT OSD  
DIGITAL  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
PRESS MENU V TO  
RESTORE INPUT NAME  
%!DIGITAL  
OFF  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
ON  
OFF  
EDIT INPUT NAME  
DVD1 2-CH MODE  
L7 FILM  
L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
DVD1  
^
USE LAST  
W Y BUTTONS TO EDIT  
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS  
V BUTTON TO ADVANCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
The appearance of the  
ANALOG IN menu depends  
on the configuration of  
the analog audio input  
connectors. Refer to page  
3-8 for more information.  
NONE  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
%!PLII + THX  
%!PLII MOVIE  
%!PLII MUSIC  
%!PRO LOGIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
PARTY  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
Selecting the INPUT SETUP  
menu MAIN ADVANCED  
option opens the MAIN  
ADV menu shown above.  
The parameters on the left  
side of this menu are  
identical regardless of  
which input is selected.  
The settings on the right  
side are adjustable. Default  
parameter settings differ  
from input to input. The  
MAIN ADV menu shown  
above indicates the default  
parameter settings for the  
DVD1 input. The MAIN ADV  
menus shown on page 3-17  
indicate default parameter  
settings for each input.  
DVD1 DTS-ES MODE  
DTS-ES L7 FILM  
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
DTS-ES THX  
DTS-ES  
DTS-ES 2-CHAN  
USE LAST  
DVD1 DIGITAL IN  
COAX-1  
COAX-2  
COAX-3  
ON  
OFF  
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
COAX-4  
OFF  
+0dB  
OPTICAL-1  
OPTICAL-2  
OPTICAL-3  
OPTICAL-4  
NONE  
-18 to +12dB  
AUTO GAIN  
+0.0dB  
Indicates the current  
amount of analog audio  
input level adjustment for  
the selected analog audio  
input connector. This  
parameter cannot be  
adjusted.  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
USE LAST  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-45  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
JBL  
Menu Tree (continued from page A-7)  
Selecting a SPEAKER SETUP menu option opens the  
corresponding menu shown below and at the right (e.g.  
selecting the CUSTOM SETUP option opens the CUSTOM  
SETUP menu shown below).  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
LOCK OPTIONS  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
DACS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
continued on page A-9  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
C
L
80Hz  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
SUBWOOFER  
UNITS  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
REAR SPEAKERS  
80Hz  
NONE  
CUSTOM SETUP  
FRONT L/R  
CENTER  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
0.0ft  
FEET  
!CAUTION!  
PRESSING THE V  
BUTTON WILL  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
OFF  
N/A  
APART  
SIDE L/R  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE  
THE OUTPUTS TO A  
SYNTHESIS  
ON  
OFF  
7CH SPEAKER  
CONFIGURATION  
N/A  
APART  
ON  
OFF  
ASA  
ASA  
TOGETHER  
CLOSE  
APART  
FEET  
METERS  
0.0 to 30.0ft  
Parameters for which the  
corresponding speaker is  
not selected cannot be  
adjusted. These parameters  
are automatically set to  
N/A.  
SUBWOOFER  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
REAR L/R SPEAKERS  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
SIDE L/R SPEAKERS  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
CENTER SPEAKER  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
FRONT L/R SPEAKERS  
FULL  
30Hz  
40Hz  
50Hz  
60Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
70Hz  
80Hz  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
NONE  
THX 80Hz  
90Hz  
100Hz  
110Hz  
120Hz  
A-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
SDP-5  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP  
INPUTS  
SPEAKERS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
DISPLAYS  
SPEAKER SETUP  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
TRIGGER  
R
SR  
RR  
80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
LOCK OPTIONS  
C
L
continued from page A-8  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
80Hz  
INTERNAL NOISE TEST  
DACS CALIBRATION  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
M
SUB  
SL RL  
80Hz 80Hz  
80Hz  
80Hz  
INTERNAL NOISE  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST  
BASS PEAK LIMITER  
CAL NOISE  
DACS CALIBRATION  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
+0.0dB  
ON  
OFF  
FRONT LEFT  
CENTER  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
SUB LIMITER  
SUB LIMIT ADJ  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
100dB  
FRONT RIGHT  
SIDE RIGHT  
REAR RIGHT  
REAR LEFT  
SIDE LEFT  
!CAUTION!  
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS  
SUBWOOFER  
SUBWOOFER  
ON  
OFF  
-18 to +12dB  
-18 to +12dB  
75 to 120dB  
Parameters for which the  
corresponding speaker is  
not selected cannot be  
adjusted. These parameters  
are automatically set to  
N/A.  
Parameters for which the  
corresponding speaker is  
not selected cannot be  
adjusted. These parameters  
are automatically set to  
N/A.  
MAIN MENU  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
BASS  
TREBLE  
TILT EQ  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
+0.0dB  
ON  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
<|>  
<|>  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
<|>  
B<  
<|>  
>F  
L<  
<|>  
>R  
ON  
OFF  
-3.0 to +3.0dB  
-6.0 to +6.0dB  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
JBL  
Menu Tree (continued from page A-9)  
Selecting a MODE ADJUST menu listening mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu shown below and on the  
next page. The parameters on the left side of these menus differ from listening mode to listening mode. The settings on  
the right side are adjustable. The listening mode menus shown below and on the next page indicate default parameter  
settings for each listening mode. All listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are shown on pages A-12 and  
A-13. The OUTPUT LEVELS, CUSTOM, and PANORAMA CALIBRATION menus are shown on page A-12.  
MAIN MENU  
MODE ADJUST  
L7 FILM  
L7 TV  
L7 MUSIC  
MODE ADJUST  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SETUP  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
%!PLII + THX  
%!PLII MOVIE  
%!PLII MUSIC  
%!PRO LOGIC  
dts neo:6 FILM  
dts neo:6 MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
CATHEDRAL  
PANORAMA  
PARTY  
2-CHANNEL  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
5.1 L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 TV  
R
L7 FILM  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
dts neo:6 FILM  
CHURCH  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
ON  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
FRONT STEERING MSURR  
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
MID RT  
BASS RT  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5
ON  
20m  
1.56s  
1.87s  
24ms  
2.4kHz  
-3dB  
ON  
REAR  
OFF  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
OFF  
OFF  
R
dts neo:6 MUSIC  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OFF  
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM  
NIGHTCLUB  
%!PLII + THX  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
LIVENESS  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
11  
ON  
5m  
L7 TV  
CATHEDRAL  
RE-EQUALIZER  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 THXI*  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
FRONT STEERING  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SOUND STAGE  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
ON  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
MID RT  
BASS RT  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
12  
ON  
30m  
3.72s  
4.47s  
23ms  
3.1kHz  
-8dB  
196ms  
5ms  
9.0kHz  
+3dB  
5.1 THXI MUSIC  
%!DIGITAL*  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
DTS-ES L7 FILM*  
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC*  
DTS-ES THX *  
DTS THXI MUSIC  
DTS-ES*  
FILM  
OFF  
REAR  
OFF  
%!PLII MOVIE THX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OFF  
CONCERT HALL  
CUSTOM  
%!PLII MUSIC THX  
CENTER DEPTH  
SPEECH DETECT  
SIZE  
LIVENESS  
PRE-DELAY  
ROLLOFF  
EFFECT LVL  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
12  
ON  
20m  
1.72s  
OFF  
2.4kHz  
-2dB  
PANORAMA  
CTR WIDTH  
OFF  
3
PANORAMA  
EFFECT LVL  
DTS-ES 2-CHAN*  
5.1a BYPASS  
2CH BYPASS  
L7 MUSIC  
DIMENSION  
NEUTRAL  
10ms  
+4dB  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
FRONT STEERING MUSIC  
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
SURROUND DLY  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
BASS CONTENT STEREO  
LOW FREQ WIDTH  
SURR ROLLOFF  
+0  
3.1kHz  
* These listening mode names differ depending on the  
input source, the speaker configuration, and certain  
parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode  
Descriptions section that begins on page 5-3 for more  
information.  
OFF  
OFF  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
INPUT BALANCE  
CALIBRATION  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
<|>  
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
%!PRO LOGIC THX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM  
A-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
SDP-5  
PARTY  
5.1 L7 FILM  
5.1 THXI  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC  
DTS-ES 2-CHAN  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
RE-EQUALIZER  
SURROUND EX  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
AUTO  
OFF  
EFFECT LVL  
-9dB  
ON  
3.1kHz  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
CENTER MIX  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
OFF  
OFF  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
+0.0dB  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
+0dB  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
LFE MIX  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
+0dB  
2-CHANNEL  
SUB LEVEL  
CUSTOM  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
ESI DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ESI DECODING  
SUB LEVEL  
CUSTOM  
+0dB  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5.1 MONO SURR  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5.1 THXI MUSIC  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
MONO LOGIC  
EFFECT LVL  
ACADEMY FILTER  
SURR ROLLOFF  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
DTS-ES THX  
5.1a BYPASS  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
5.1 L7 TV  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
-9dB  
ON  
3.1kHz  
RE-EQUALIZER  
LFE MIX  
ESI DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
ON  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
5.1 MONO  
SUB LEVEL  
CUSTOM  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
+0dB  
%!DIGITALTHX  
2CH BYPASS  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
EX DECODING  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
AUTO  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
NO PARAMETERS  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
MONO SURROUND  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
DTS-ES L7 FILM  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
LFE MIX  
ESI DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
DTS THXI MUSIC  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
BASS ENHANCE  
RE-EQUALIZER  
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
MONO  
SUB LEVEL  
CUSTOM  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
CENTER MIX  
SURROUND MIX  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
MASTER LEVEL  
COMPRESSION  
LFE MIX  
SUB LEVEL  
CUSTOM  
+0.0dB  
OFF  
DTS-ES THX  
LFE MIX  
ESI DECODING  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
CUSTOM  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0  
+0dB  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
+0dB  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
AUTO  
OFF  
+0.0dB  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
JBL  
Menu Tree (continued from page A-11)  
5 SPKR ENHANCE  
CALIBRATION  
CNTR DLY SAMPLES  
-127 to +127  
EFFECT LVL  
LIVENESS  
PANORAMA  
ON  
OFF  
-12 to +6dB  
30ms to 20.2s  
ON  
OFF  
PANORAMA CALIBRATION  
SOURCE  
SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg  
LISTENER POS +0  
LEFT & RIGHT  
NOTE:  
ENSURE THAT  
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS  
BEEN PERFORMED  
PROPERLY  
ACADEMY FILTER  
COMPRESSION  
ESI DECODING  
AUTO  
LOW FREQ WIDTH  
-25 to +25dB  
PRE-DELAY  
OFF, 1 to 100ms  
ON  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
-127  
+0  
+127  
AUTO AZIMUTH  
CTR WIDTH  
EX DECODING  
MASTER LEVEL  
-5 to +5dB  
RE-EQUALIZER  
10 to 90deg  
ON  
OFF  
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX  
AUTO  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
RIGHT  
LEFT & RIGHT  
LEFT  
BASS CONTENT  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM  
CUSTOM VS PRESET  
RESET MODE  
FRONT STEERING  
MID RT  
REAR DLY OFFSET  
OFF  
BINAURL  
MONO  
STEREO  
24ms to 24.3s  
OFF, 1 to 30ms  
MSURR  
MUSIC  
FILM  
PRESS RIGHT V  
TO RESTORE MODE  
BASS ENHANCE  
CENTER DEPTH  
CENTER MIX  
INPUT BALANCE  
OUTPUT LEVELS  
0UTPUT LEVELS  
CENTER  
SIDE L/R  
ROLLOFF  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
PRESET  
CUSTOM  
ON  
OFF  
0 to 18  
L<  
<|>  
>R  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
+0dB  
REAR L/R  
SUBWOOFER  
BASS RT  
DIMENSION  
LFE MIX  
SIZE  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
5ms to 48.6s  
-25 to +5dB  
FRONT  
NEUTRAL  
REAR  
-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB  
4 to 20 or 30m  
A-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
SDP-5  
When the Shift command bank is active, pressing the remote control Stat button opens the STATUS menu for the current  
input source. This menu contains parameters that provide information about the current input source and listening mode.  
STATUS menus are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, dts(-ES), digital, and analog input sources. Refer to page 2-18  
for more information.  
SOUND STAGE  
SURROUND DLY  
SURROUND EX  
FRONT  
NEUTRAL  
REAR  
0 to 15ms  
STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current input source and listening mode. These parameters  
cannot be adjusted. Refer to the STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions section that begins on page 2-23 for more  
information.  
SPEECH DETECT  
2CH STATUS  
%!D STATUS  
PG1  
%!D STATUS  
PG2  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
INPUT  
MODE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
SAMPLE RATE  
2.0 ENCODING  
DIALOG OFFSET  
MIX ROOM  
ON  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
EX ENCODIN G  
CENTER MIX LVL  
SURR MIX LVL  
dB  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
0
-6  
SURROUND MIX  
SUB LEVEL  
-15  
-30  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-5 to +5dB  
OFF, -30 to +12dB  
-45  
-45  
DTS-ES STATUS  
PG1  
DTS-ES STATUS  
PG2  
5.1a BYPASS STATUS  
SURR ROLLOFF  
VOCAL ENHANCE  
INPUT  
MODE  
CHANNELS  
BIT RATE  
WORD LENGTH  
SAMPLE RATE  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF  
+6.0dB  
+3.0dB  
+0.0dB  
ESI ENCODING  
dB  
L
C
R
SL SR SB LFE  
0
-6  
-15  
-30  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Activating the SDP-5 while pressing and holding the  
front panel or remote control Mute button opens the  
FACTORY SETTINGS menu shown below. Refer to page  
6-4 for more information.  
-45  
2CH BYPASS STATUS  
DIGITAL STATUS  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
INPUT  
MODE  
INPUT TYPE  
SAMPLE RATE  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
EXIT  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
HAVE BEEN RESTORED  
PRESS ANY KEY  
TO RESTART  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
JBL Synthesis  
INSTALLATION WORKSHEET  
DVD1  
DVD2  
SAT  
VCR  
TV  
CD  
TUNER  
AUX  
INPUT SETUP  
NAME  
DIGITAL IN  
ANALOG IN  
ANLG IN LVL  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
2-CH  
DD D  
dts-ES  
MAIN ADV  
INPUT SELECT  
2-CH ANLG BYP  
S-VIDEO 16:9  
S-VIDEO 4:3 OSD  
COMPONENT OSD  
ZONE2 IN  
A-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
SDP-5  
CUSTOM SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP  
SYNTHESIS 7CH 80Hz  
SYNTHESIS 7CH 80Hz  
SYNTHESIS 7CH 80Hz  
SPEAKER DISTANCES  
LEVELS CALIBRATION  
SPEAKER SETUP  
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT  
CENTER  
SIDE LEFT/RIGHT  
REAR LEFT/RIGHT  
SUBWOOFER  
THX ULTRA2 SUB  
BGC  
SYNTHESIS 7CH 80Hz  
ASA  
UNITS  
CAL NOISE  
SUB LIMITER  
SUB LIMIT ADJ  
SETTINGS  
REAR PANEL CONFIG  
Circle One  
8 STEREO INPUTS  
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG  
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG  
. . . Installation Worksheet continues on page A-16  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
JBL Synthesis  
Installation Worksheet (continued from page A-15)  
SETTING  
SETTING  
SETTING  
DISPLAY SETUP  
TRIGGER SETUP  
LOCK OPTIONS  
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY  
STATUS  
REMOTE ONLY  
SETUP  
If the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF,  
circle the inputs and listening modes selected  
for program operation.  
AUDIO CNTRL  
MODES  
POSITION  
DVD1  
PANORAMA  
FORMAT  
DVD2  
PARTY  
SETTING  
AUDIO CONTROLS  
SAT  
2-CHANNEL  
BACKGROUND  
REMOTE STATE  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY  
STATUS  
VCR  
MONO LOGIC  
MONO SURROUND  
MONO  
BASS  
TV  
CD  
TREBLE  
TUNER  
5.1 L7 FILM  
AUX  
5.1 L7 TV  
TILT EQ  
ZONE2 INPUTS  
L7 FILM  
5.1 L7 MUSIC  
5.1 THX SurEX  
DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
5.1 2-CHANNEL  
5.1 MONO LOGIC  
5.1 MONO SURR  
5.1 MONO  
BRIGHTNESS  
LOUDNESS  
BALANCE  
FADER  
L7 TV  
A/V SYNC DELAY  
CUSTOM NAME  
EDIT CUSTOM NAME  
L7 MUSIC  
L7 MUSIC SURR  
DOLBY PLII + THX  
DOLBY PLII MOVIE  
DOLBY PLII MUSIC  
DOLBY PRO LOGIC  
dts NEO:6 FILM  
dts NEO:6 MUSIC  
NIGHTCLUB  
CONCERT HALL  
CHURCH  
ZONE2 BALANCE  
dts(-ES) L7 FILM  
dts(-ES) L7 MUSIC  
dts (-ES) THX  
dts THX MUSIC  
dts(-ES)  
VOLUME CONTROL  
SETUP  
SETTING  
MAIN PWR ON  
MUTE LEVEL  
dts(-ES) 2-CHAN  
5.1a BYPASS  
ZONE PWR ON  
CATHEDRAL  
2CH BYPASS  
A-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Intel Telephone D945PVS User Manual
Invacare Mobility Aid Tilt in Space Wheelchair User Manual
Jenn Air Appliance Trim Kit JGC8536ADB User Manual
Jensen Portable Speaker JS43 User Manual
John Lewis Washer Dryer JLBIWM 1402 User Manual
JVC Cassette Player KS FX201 User Manual
Kambrook Fan KFH280 User Manual
Kenwood Marine Radio TK 5710 User Manual
KitchenAid Ventilation Hood KWC380J User Manual
Kodak Digital Camera P712 User Manual